Owners Manual Mirage G4 2018 PDF

Outlander
/ 2018 OWNER’S MANUAL

Mirage G4
2018 / OWNER’S MANUAL
© Copyright 2017 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc

BK0249600US.book 1 ページ２０１７年４月２０日　木曜日　午後１時３６分
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

N00100202775
Instrument cluster P.5-63
Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-81
Wiper and washer switch P.5-81

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-78
Turn-signal lever P.5-80
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-81
Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) P.5-54
Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13

Ignition switch (if so equipped)
P.5-36
Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch
P.5-52
Electric remote-controlled outside rearview Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air-
mirror switch P.5-35 bag (for driver) P.4-22, 4-28
Horn switch P.5-84
Steering wheel height adjustment lever Steering wheel remote control switches
P.5-33 [Refer to the separate owner’s manual.]
Fuse box P.9-22 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-driver’s knee airbag

P.4-22, 4-29
1-1 Overview
Instruments and controls
1
Center vents P.7-2 Heater (if so equipped) P.7-4
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air- Manual air conditioning (if so
bag (for front passenger) P.4-22, 4-28 equipped) P.7-7
DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped),
Smartphone Link Display Audio (if so equipped), Electric rear window defogger switch
Clock (if so equipped) P.5-83
[Refer to the separate owner’s manual.]
Automatic air conditioning (if so

Side vents P.7-2 equipped) P.7-12
Engine hood release lever Glove compartment

P.9-4 P.5-93
Key slot (if so equipped)
P.5-20 12 V power outlets
Cup holder (for the front seat) P.5-86 Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-93 P.5-83
Trunk lid release lever P.5-27
USB input terminal P.5-84
Fuel tank filler door release lever
P.3-3 Gearshift lever (if so equipped) P.5-39
Selector lever (if so equipped) P.5-41
Heated seats switches (if so equipped) P.4-4
Cup holder (for the rear seat) Parking brake lever P.5-32
P.5-93
Overview 1-2
Interior
1 Interior
N00100302460
Power window lock switch

P.5-29 Microphone
[Refer to the separate owner’s manual.] Dome light P.5-92, 9-28
Power door lock switch (if so Assist grips

Inside rearview mirror P.5-33
equipped) P.5-25 P.5-95 Sun visors P.5-85
Vanity mirror P.5-85
Power window switch P.5-29 Card holder P.5-85
Bottle holders P.5-94
Head restraints P.4-5
Seat belts P.4-7
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-

curtain airbags P.4-22, 4-33 Front seats P.4-2
Manual window control Supplemental restraint system

(if so equipped) P.5-29 (SRS)-side airbags (for front
Tether anchorages for child restraint seat) P.4-22, 4-33
system P.4-17 Arm rest (Driver’s seat only, if so
Trunk-through lid P.4-5 equipped) P. 4-4
Jack P.8-5
Arm rest P.4-5 Cup holder (for the rear seat) Rear seat P.4-5
P.5-93
1-3 Overview
Luggage area
Luggage area 1
N00100501553
Trunk room light P.9-28
Tools P.8-5
Spare tire P.8-7
Overview 1-4
Outside
1 Outside
N00100602724
Windshield wipers P.5-81

Power window P.5-29
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-35
Fuel tank filler P.3-3
Engine hood P.9-4
F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced

Security Transmitter) (if so equipped)
P.5-9
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
Front fog lights (if so equipped) P.5-6
P.5-81, 9-27, 9-30 Side turn signal lights Locking and unlocking P.5-24
(if so equipped)
P.5-80, 9-27
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights Front side- marker lights
P.5-80, 9-27, 9-29 P.5-78, 9-27, 9-29
Headlights/Daytime running lights (if so equipped)
P.5-78, 9-27, 9-29
1-5 Overview
Outside
Tire pressure monitoring system

(if so equipped) P.5-58
High-mounted stop light Antenna P.7-19 Changing tires P.8-6
P.9-27 Size of tires and wheels P.11-5
Tire inflation pressure P.9-15
Tire rotation P.9-17
Tire chains P.9-18
Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

P.5-61
Trunk lid P.5-27
Rear side- marker lights P.5-78, 9-27, 9-31

License plate lights
Tail and stop lights P.5-78, 9-27, 9-31
P.5-78, 9-27, 9-32
Rear turn signal lights
P.5-80, 9-27, 9-31
Back-up light P.9-27, 9-31
Overview 1-6
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200702292
NOTE
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-77
tance.
Charging system warning light

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-14
tance.
(Illuminates and intermittent sounds)
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil
level.
If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked P. 5-77
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
Oil pressure warning light as possible.
Quick index 2-1


 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
2 released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
or the brake fluid level. P. 5-75
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
Brake warning light braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing.
Selector lever position indicator in the P. 5-44
If the indicator does not go off, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
instrument cluster flashes rapidly
repair facility of your choice immediately.
(once per second)
 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
or engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency
P. 5-76
roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-
Engine malfunction indicator 4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or towing company for assistance.
“Check engine light”)
 If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the
steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors P. 5-50
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
Electric power steering system (EPS)
warning light
2-2 Quick index


 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
the ordinary braking system is functioning. 2
Test the system as described on page 5-50. P. 5-49
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
Anti-lock braking system warning you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
light facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
P. 4-28
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
SRS warning light
 Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized

Selector lever position indicator in the P. 5-44
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice immediately.
instrument cluster flashes slowly
(every 2 seconds)
Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
and  If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
P. 5-53
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
as possible.
ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator  When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning.
Quick index 2-3


2 Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-48
as possible.
ASC indicator  When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.
Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.
 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving. P. 5-58
 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
Tire pressure monitoring system warn- ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
ing light (if so equipped) mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200902018
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Unable to turn the key.
(except for vehicles equipped
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
From “ACC” to “OFF”
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
P. 5-37
Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.
(for vehicles equipped with the Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
F.A.S.T.-key) Vehicles with manual transaxle:
Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down, and then press the engine switch while
depressing the brake pedal. P. 5-16
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch
while depressing the brake pedal.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the door.
ate.
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the floor console, and then start the engine or P. 5-18, 5-19
(for vehicles equipped with the
change the operation mode.
F.A.S.T.-key)
Quick index 2-5


Cannot shift the selector lever
2 from the “P” (PARK) position. Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-41
(for vehicles with continuously Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
variable transmission (CVT))
The windows are fogged up.
Vehicles equipped with the heater without air conditioning function or the manual air
conditioning:
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position. P. 7-6, 7-10,
2. Turn on the blower. 7-14
Vehicles equipped with the automatic air conditioning:
Push the defogger switch to change the “ ” mode.
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P. 8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-11
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
The high coolant temperature
warning light is illuminated.
The engine is overheated.

P. 8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Steam comes out of the engine

compartment.
2-6 Quick index


The vehicle is stuck in sand,
mud or snow
Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. P. 8-13 2
WARNING
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

The brakes are not functioning
properly after crossing a puddle Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P. 6-5
or stream.
The continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) makes no shift
change when accelerating. The There may be a problem in the CVT.
initial movement of the vehicle Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of P. 5-44
is slow when the vehicle starts your choice immediately.
moving.
(for vehicles with CVT)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P. 8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire.
Quick index 2-7

General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent
Methanol
N00301001980
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank erly. taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
filler pipe specifically designed to accept only type of alcohol could adversely affect the
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens- vehicle’s performance and damage critical
ing nozzle.
Octane requirement parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on

WARNING unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
Reformulated gasoline
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.
sive. You could be burned, seriously Many areas of the country require the use of
injured or killed when handling it. When-
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the Oxygenated gasoline lated Gasoline”.
engine and keep flames, sparks, and
smoking materials away from the vehicle. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- Gasoline sold at some service stations con- and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
door areas. tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although emissions and improve air quality.
the oxygenates may not be identified by those Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-
names. Oxygenates are required in some ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-
CAUTION areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in erly blended reformulated gasoline has no
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will your vehicle. adverse effect on vehicle performance or the
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and durability of the engine and fuel system.
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- Ethanol (Gasohol)
line is illegal, and will void your warranty
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter,
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl
and oxygen sensors. A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco- manganese tricarbonyl)
hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
in your vehicle, provided the octane number MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
Gasoline detergent additives is at least as high as that recommended for additive that is blended into some gasolines
unleaded gasoline. to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi
In the United States, fuel suppliers are Motors Corporation recommends using gaso-
required by law to add detergents to their gas- lines without MMT.
3-2 General information

Filling the fuel tank

Use of gasolines blended with MMT may
adversely affect performance, and cause the
NOTE WARNING
 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems  Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
malfunction indicator on your instrument
such as hard starting, stalling during idling, sive. You could be burned, seriously
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an
abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera- injured or killed when handling it. When
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a tion. If you experience any of these prob- refueling your vehicle, always turn the 3
repair facility of your choice for assistance. lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. engine off and keep away from flames,
If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER- sparks, and smoking materials. Always
VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
Sulfur in gasoline light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as areas.
soon as possible by the nearest authorized  Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility be sure to get rid of your body’s static
isfy California’s low-emission regulations of your choice. electricity by touching a metal part of the
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.  Repeatedly driving short distances at low car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel your body could create a spark that
than California is allowed to have a higher system and engine, resulting in hard starting ignites fuel vapor.
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could and poor acceleration. If these problems  Perform the whole refueling process
occur, you are advised to add a detergent (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-
additive to the gasoline when you refuel the ing the fuel tank filler cap, etc.) by your-
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos- self; do not let any other person near the
cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or its, thereby returning the engine to a normal fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to
“Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina- condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi help you and that person was carrying
tion of this indicator while using high-sulfur Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an static electricity, fuel vapor could be
gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehi- unsuitable additive could make an engine ignited.
cle’s emission-control system is malfunction- malfunction. For details, please contact the  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
ing. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. until refueling is finished. If you moved
dealer may suggest using a different, lower- away and did something else (for example,
sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to deter- sitting on a seat) part-way through the
mine if the problem is fuel-related. Filling the fuel tank refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
N00301102005
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
contains toxic substances.
WARNING
 Keep the doors and windows closed while
 When handling fuel, comply with the
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
safety regulations displayed by garages
fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
and filling stations.
General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
Fuel tank capacity turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-
WARNING
 Since the fuel system may be under pres-
clockwise.
9.2 gal (35 L) sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
3 uum that might have built up in the fuel
Refueling tank. If the fuel tank filler cap is venting
vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. until the sound stops before removing the
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear fuel tank filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
driver side of your vehicle. spray out, injuring you or others.
The fuel tank filler door can be opened
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank 5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly
filler door release lever located at the left AJA117951 on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-
side of the driver’s seat. zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-
1- Remove
zle in the fuel tank filler port as far as it
2- Close
goes.
4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel tank CAUTION

filler cap cord on the hook located on the  Your vehicle can only be operated using
inside surface of the fuel tank filler door. unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-
lytic converter damage will result if leaded
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and
consequently, this must never be attempted.
6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do

not add more fuel.
AJA117964

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED
CAUTION NOTE UNDER WARRANTY.
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not  If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could driving, the engine malfunction indicator Examples of modifications to your vehicle
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint- (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it engine light”) may come on when the
that can cause damage or performance prob- 3
lems include the following:
off with a soft cloth. onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs
a self check.
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap parts
you hear at least 3 clicks.
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking The indicator will go off after several driving  Failure to use required fuel and fluids
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank cycles. If the indicator does not go off, con-  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels
filler door closed. tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as emission, suspension, engine, drive train
WARNING soon as possible. or electrical wiring systems
 Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is  Modification of any onboard com-
securely closed. If the fuel tank filler cap puter/control module, including repro-
were loose, fuel could leak, resulting in a
fire.
Modifications to and racing gramming, or replacing/adding chips to
any onboard computer/control module
of your vehicle
N00301600194
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-
CAUTION This vehicle should not be modified with ual for further details regarding warranty cov-
 If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. erage.
use only the fuel tank filler cap specified for Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures
your model vehicle. high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
Installation of accessories
safety and durability. Modifications using
N00301701277
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil- CAUTION
ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-  Before any electrical or electronic accesso-
ble state and/or federal regulations. ries are installed, consult an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-
TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

Refer to the “Specifications” section for
CAUTION information regarding wheel and tire
Modification/alterations to the
 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis
sizes. electrical or fuel systems
connector (data link connector) for checking N00301800183
and servicing the electronic control system.
3 Mitsubishi Motors does not recommend con- WARNING Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
necting a device other than the Scan Tool for vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
 While driving, do not use a cellular phone
inspections and service to this connector in a way that hinders safe driving. Any- important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
because an unexpected problem could result. thing, including cellular phone usage, that Motors dealer before installation of any
In addition, malfunctions caused by connect- distracts you from the safe operation of accessory which may involve modification of
ing a device other than the Scan Tool may your vehicle increases your risk of an acci- the electrical or fuel systems.
not be covered under warranty. dent.
Refer to and follow all state and local laws
 The installation of accessories, optional
in your area regarding cellular phone
CAUTION
parts, etc., should only be performed  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
usage while driving.
within the limits prescribed by law, and in Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
accordance with the guidelines and warn- sory fitment or modification.
ings contained within the documents If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
accompanying this vehicle.
Important point! improper installation methods are used (pro-
Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces- tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
Due to the large number of accessory and devices may be adversely affected, resulting
sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
replacement parts provided by different man- in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
 Improper installation of electrical parts
could cause a fire. Refer to the “Modifica- ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos-
tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
systems” section within this owner’s man- dealer to check whether the attachment or Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
ual. installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu- parts
 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside ine parts affects the driving safety of your
N00301400219
the vehicle without an external antenna Mitsubishi-vehicle.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
may cause electrical system interference,
designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera-
dards of performance, and are recommended
tion.
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec-
able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
ifications must not be used.
a wide variety of accessories to personalize
your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements

vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
authorized accessories to choose from to tai-
lor your new vehicle to your own personal
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s
Parts Manager has information on various 3
audio systems, protection items, as well as
interior and exterior accessories available for
your specific model.
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
N00300100017
Certain components of this vehicle, such as

airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
materials.
Special handling may apply. For additional
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
waste/perchlorate.

Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-2
Rear seat ...........................................................................................4-5
Head restraints .................................................................................4-5
Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-7
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-13
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-13
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-14
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-22
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-22
Seats
Seats Seats and restraint systems WARNING

N00408401593 N00401601235  Do not place objects under the seats. This
could prevent the seat from locking
Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety
securely, and it could lead to an accident.
features that help protect you and your pas- It may also cause damage to the seat or
sengers in an accident. other parts.
4 Seat belts are the most important safety
device. When worn properly, seat belts can
reduce the chance of serious injury or death
in various types of crashes. For added protec-
Front seats
N00401800403
tion during a severe frontal collision, your
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen- ble while maintaining a position that still
gers. The seats, head restraints, and door enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily
locks also are safety equipment, which must control the steering wheel and safely operate
be used correctly. the vehicle.
1 - Front seats
Always check the following before you drive:
 To adjust the seat forward or backward 
Page 4-3  That everyone in your vehicle is properly
 To adjust the seatbacks  Page 4-3 wearing their seat belt.
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat  That infants and small children are prop-
only, if so equipped)  Page 4-4 erly secured in an appropriate child
 Arm rest (Driver’s seat only, if so restraint system in the rear seat.
equipped)  Page 4-4  That all doors are fully closed and locked.
 Heated seats (if so equipped)  Page 4-4  That seatbacks are upright, with head
restraints properly adjusted.
2 - Rear seat
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
 Arm rest  Page 4-5 death in all motor vehicle accidents. How- WARNING
 Trunk-through lid  Page 4-5 ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury or  Do not attempt to adjust the seat while
death by following the instructions in this driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
manual. trol and result in an accident.
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

Front seats
WARNING CAUTION To adjust the seatbacks

 After adjusting the seat, make sure that  When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, N00402000369
seat is securely locked into position. pay careful attention to the rear seat passen- To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly,
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious gers.
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then
injury or death during deployment of the
lean backward to a comfortable position and
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
To adjust the seat forward or release the lever. The seatback will lock in 4
back as possible while maintaining a posi- backward place.
tion that still enables you to fully apply the N00401900316
pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
and safely operate the vehicle.
seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
 To reduce the risk to the front passenger
of serious injury or death during deploy-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
ment of the passenger’s airbag, always seat in place.
properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
ble.
 Always place children 12 years old and
under in the rear seat and use appropriate
child restraint systems.
CAUTION
CAUTION  The reclining mechanism used in the seat-
 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an back is spring loaded, and will cause the
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex- seatback to return quickly to the vertical
pected accident might occur. position when the lock lever is operated.
 Do not place a cushion or the like between When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
your back and the seatback while driving. WARNING back or hold the seatback with your hand to
The effectiveness of the head restraints will  To make sure that the seat is securely control its return motion.
be reduced in the event of an accident. locked, try to move it forward or back-
 When sliding the seats, be careful not to ward without using the adjusting lever.
catch your hand or leg.
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Front seats
WARNING NOTE
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or  Do not stand or sit on the arm rest. It could
death in the event of an accident or sud- break.
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 Seat belt performance during an accident
Heated seats (if so equipped)
N00435601476
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is The heated seats can be operated by pushing
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor- the switch when the ignition switch or the
mance will be adversely affected. If the operation mode is in ON. The indicator light
seat belt is not properly positioned against 1- To move the seat cushion up (A) will illuminate while the heater is on.
the body during an accident, there is 2- To move the seat cushion down
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
Arm rest (Driver’s seat only, if
so equipped)
To adjust the seat height N00402301079
(Driver’s seat only, if so To adjust the arm rest angle, tip the arm rest
equipped) forward and then raise it to the desired posi-
N00402100243
tion. To release the arm rest angle, raise it
fully reward as shown.
To adjust the seat height, turn the dial as
shown in the illustration.
1 (HI) - Heater high
(for quick heating)
2 (neutral position) - Heater off
3 (LO) - Heater low
(to keep the seat
warm)

Rear seat
WARNING CAUTION Trunk-through lid

 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the N00409001062
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill- seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before Open the lid to gain access to the luggage
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use, attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater compartment from the cabin. This feature is
fatigue or other physical conditions or off immediately if it appears to be malfunc- useful for storing small items and carrying
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns tioning during use.
when using the heated seat even at low
long objects while accommodating 2 passen- 4
gers in the rear seat.
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care Rear seat Fold down the arm rest, then pull the strap
when using the heated seat. N00402501257
(A) to open the lid.
Arm rest
CAUTION N00403001334
 Switch off the heated seats when not in use. To use the arm rest, tilt the arm rest down for
Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for use as shown.
quick heating. After the seat has become The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-
“Cup holder” on page 5-93.
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
seat temperature may be felt while using the
heated seats. This is caused by the operation
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does
not indicate a malfunction.
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
into the seat.
Head restraints
N00404301637
 Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using Padded head restraints for the seats can
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele- reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your
ment to overheat. vehicle is hit from the rear.
 When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic trated position.
solvents; doing so can cause damage not NOTE To maximize the effectiveness of your head
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the  Never sit on an arm rest. restraint, adjust the front seatback to the
heater. Doing so could damage the arm rest.

Head restraints
upright position and the head restraint to the
proper position. Sit back against the seatback
WARNING Adjustment of the head
with your head close to the head restraint.  Never place a cushion or similar device on restraint height (front seats)
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
restraint. adjust the head restraint height so that the
4 center of the restraint is at your ear level
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their ear level when seated
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
position.
 To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.

 To lower the restraint, push down on it
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
direction shown by the arrow.
WARNING  After adjusting the height, push down on
 Driving without the head restraints in the restraint to make sure it is locked in
place can cause you and your passengers position.
serious injury or death in an accident. To
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
always make sure the head restraints are
installed and properly positioned when
the seat is occupied.
 In order to minimize the risk of a neck
injury due to a rear impact, the front seat-
back must be adjusted to the upright posi-
tion and the head restraint to the proper
position before vehicle operation. The
driver should never adjust the seat while
the vehicle is in motion.

Seat belts
To remove To install CAUTION

 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction First check that the head restraint is facing in fers according to the seat. Always use the
shown by the arrows. Then pull the head the right direction as shown in the previous correct head restraint provided for the seat
restraint up and out of the seatback. illustration, and then insert it into the seat- and do not install the head restraint in the
back. Push the head restraint down while wrong direction.
pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
4
locks into place.
CAUTION
 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
head restraint up to make sure that it is
locked in place and will not come out of the
seatback.
WARNING
 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of an accident, the head Seat belts
restraints must be properly installed and N00406001540
positioned to proper height before vehicle Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help
operation. reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-
senger in the event of an accident. Always
use the provided seat belts.
Carefully review the following information
for proper seat belt usage.

Seat belts
WARNING WARNING WARNING

 To help reduce the risk of injury or death  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious  Children 12 years old and under should
in an accident, seat belts and child injury or death during deployment of the always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
restraint systems must always be used. driver’s airbag, always properly wear the erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far serious injury or death in an accident,
4-14 for additional information. back as possible while maintaining a posi- especially due to a deploying front passen-
4  Never use one seat belt for more than one tion that still enables you to fully apply the ger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-
person. pedals, easily control the steering wheel, tems” on page 4-14 for additional
 Never carry more people in your vehicle and safely operate the vehicle. information.
than there are seat belts.  To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-  Any child who is too small to properly
 Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit. ger of serious injury or death from a wear a seat belt must be properly
 Always place the shoulder belt over your deploying airbag, make sure the passenger restrained in an appropriate child
shoulder and across your chest. Never put always wears the seat belt properly, restraint system.
it behind you or under your arm. remains seated all the way back and  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
upright in their seat, and moves the seat as child safety seat and positioned in the rear
 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
across your hips, not around your waist. far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- seat.
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on  In the event of an accident, all seat belt
 Never insert any foreign object, such as a
page 4-22 for additional information. assemblies, including retractors and
piece of plastic, paper clip, button or coin,
 Never hold an infant or child in your arms attachment hardware, should be inspected
into the seat belt buckle.
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
even when you are wearing your seat belt. dealer to determine whether replacement
Never place any part of the seat belt you is necessary.
are wearing around an infant or child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions
creates a risk of serious injury or death to Seat belt instructions
your child in the event of an accident or N00406201539
sudden stop. All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
 Never modify or alter the seat belts in an emergency locking retractor.
your vehicle.
This system is designed to provide both com-
fort and safety. It permits full extension and
automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device

Seat belts
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the 1. Occupants should always sit back in their
retractor in the event of a sudden change in seats with their backs against the upright
WARNING
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
the vehicle’s motion. seatback. To reduce the risk of serious
death in the event of an accident or sud-
injury or death during deployment of the
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
NOTE airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back the upright position while the vehicle is in
as possible while maintaining a position motion.
 For instructions on installing a child restraint
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a that still enables you to fully apply the Seat belt performance during an accident 4
child restraint system using the seat belt” on pedals, easily control the steering wheel, can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
page 4-19. and safely operate the vehicle. The front are reclined. The more a seatback is
passenger seat should also be moved as reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
far back as possible. Refer to “Supple- mance will be adversely affected. If the
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
on page 4-22. Also refer to “To adjust the
increased risk you will slide under the belt
seat forward or backward” on page 4-3.
and receive serious injury or death.
2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the

webbing so that it easily pulls across your
body.

Seat belts
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding 4. The lap part of the belt must always be
the latch plate. Push the latch plate into worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
WARNING
 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull up on the shoulder portion of the belt to
is worn as low as possible across the hips,
up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is take up any slack in the lap belt.
not around the waist. Failure to follow this
locked securely in the buckle. instruction will increase the risk of serious
injury or death in the event of an accident.
4  Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
adversely affect seat belt performance.
5. To release the belt, press the button on the

buckle and allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it
out and check for kinks or twists in the
webbing. Then make sure it remains
NOTE untwisted as it retracts.
NOTE  With the exception of the seat belt for the
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi- NOTE
out, pull it once with force and let it retract tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-  If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty,
all the way. ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again. seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac- belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint mild soap or detergent solution.
installation function (see page 4-19).
When the ALR function has been activated,
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.

Seat belts
Driver’s seat belt WARNING

reminder/warning light  In order to reduce the risk of serious
N00418400384
injury or death in an accident, always fas-
ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
A tone and warning light are used to remind one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she
the driver to fasten the seat belt. is also seated and fastening a seat belt.
Children should additionally be restrained 4
in a secure child restraint system.
NOTE
 If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas- When the ignition switch is turned to the
tened, the warning light and the tone will “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
issue further warnings each time the vehicle ON, this indicator normally comes on and
starts moving from a stop. goes off a few seconds later.
The light comes on when a person sits on the
front passenger seat but does not fasten the
Front passenger seat belt warn- seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” ing light sequently fastened.
position or the operation mode is put in ON N00418300237
without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a
warning light will come on and a tone will
The front passenger seat belt warning light is WARNING
located at shown in the illustration.  When a child booster seat is used on the
sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind
front passenger seat, the front passenger
you to fasten your seat belt. seat belt warning light will not come on, if
If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still the seat belt is not fastened when the
unfastened, the warning light will blink and booster seat is used. Confirm that the
the tone will sound intermittently until the child is wearing the seat belt properly.
seat belt is fastened.  Do not install any accessory or sticker that
makes the light difficult to see.

Seat belts
Adjustable seat belt shoulder WARNING Installation

anchor (front seats)  Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
1. Unfasten the button (A) of the seat belt
N00406300357
the vehicle is not in motion.
 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in guide strap. Put the seat belt webbing
The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted. position after adjusting it. through the seat belt guide strap and fas-
To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A) ten the button.
4 and slide the anchor to the desired position.
Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into Seat belt guide strap (rear seat)
position. N00419301055
The seat belt guide straps are equipped on the

seatback.
The seat belt guide strap will provide comfort
by keeping away the belt webbing from your
neck.
CAUTION
 Make sure the part of the seat belt webbing
you inserted into the seat belt guide strap is
not twisted.
WARNING Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat
 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so belt performance.
that the shoulder belt is positioned across
the center of your shoulder without touch-
ing your neck. The shoulder belt should
not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-
ure to follow this instruction can adversely
affect seat belt performance and increase
the risk of serious injury or death in the
event of an accident.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

2. Fasten the seat belt and make sure it fits
snugly across your shoulder.
WARNING Seat belt pre-tensioner and
 The extender should only be used if the
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
force limiter systems
N00417701752
who can use the standard seat belt should
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
extender can adversely affect seat belt have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
performance in an accident. system and force limiter system.
4
 When not required, the extender must be
removed and stowed.
Pre-tensioner system
Seat belt use during preg- The driver and front passenger seat belts are
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
nancy tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side
Seat belt extender N00406800147
collision or when a rollover or overturning of
N00406700205
Seat belts work for everyone, including preg- the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys-
If your seat belt is not long enough, even nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant tem operates simultaneously with the deploy-
when fully extended, a seat belt extender women are more likely to be seriously injured ment of the front airbags, side airbags or
must be obtained. The extender may be used or killed in an accident if they do not wear curtain airbags.
for either of the front seats. seat belts. The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within
the seat belt retractors (A). When activated,
WARNING the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or webbing and increase seat belt performance.
death to pregnant women and unborn
children in an accident, pregnant women
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.

Child restraint systems

the ignition switch or the operation mode is
under the following conditions. These include
WARNING
 The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
all of the items listed above and all related
designed to work only once. After the seat
wiring.
belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
[Except for vehicles equipped with the they will not work again. They must
F.A.S.T.-key] promptly be replaced and the entire seat
4 The ignition switch is in the “ON” or belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an
“START” position. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in ON.
The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate

SRS warning light
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes N00408700137
under the same conditions as the airbag con-
the following components: This warning light tells you if there is a prob-
trol unit.
lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS
some smoke is released and a loud noise will warning light” on page 4-28.
be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
Force limiter system
as it may cause some temporary irritation to
N00408900142
people with respiratory problems.
The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
moderate-to-severe front or side impact, even limiter system will help reduce the force
if the seat belt is not being worn. The seat belt applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
pre-tensioners may not activate in certain col-
1- SRS warning light lisions, even though the vehicle may appear Child restraint systems
2- Front impact sensors to be severely damaged. Such non-activation N00407101753
3- Seat belt pre-tensioner does not mean that something is wrong with
When transporting infants or small children
4- Side impact sensors the seat belt pre-tensioner system, but rather
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
5- Airbag control unit that the collision forces were not severe
system must always be used. This is required
enough to activate the system.
by law in the U.S. and Canada.
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever

Child restraint systems specifically designed  Children older than 1 year of age and who
for infants and small children are offered by weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who
WARNING
 Any child who is too large to use a child
several manufacturers. Choose only a child are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must
restraint system should ride in the rear
restraint system with a label certifying that it be in a forward-facing restraint used only
seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety in the rear seat. properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle  Children who weigh more than 40 pounds tioned over the shoulder and across the
Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches chest, not across their neck, and with the 4
Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac- (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,
turer’s statement of compliance on the box use a suitable child seat or a booster seat not across their stomach. If necessary, a
and child restraint system itself. in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and- booster seat should be used to help achieve
shoulder belt fits them properly. a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster
The child restraint system should be appropri- seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use
ate for your child’s weight and height, and a booster seat that is certified as comply-
should properly fit your vehicle’s seat. WARNING ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
For detailed information, refer to the instruc-  All children must be seated in the rear Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-
seat, and properly restrained. tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
tion manual accompanying the child restraint
Accident statistics show that children of tions.
system.
all sizes and ages are safer when properly  Never hold an infant or child in your arms
restrained in the rear seat, rather than in or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,
Guidelines for child restraint the front seat. even when you are wearing your seat belt.
 Be sure to select a child restraint system Never place any part of the seat belt you
system selection that is appropriate not only for the child’s are wearing around an infant or child.
size and age but also for your vehicle. Failure to follow these simple instructions
All children should be properly restrained in Some child restraint systems may not fit creates a risk of serious injury or death to
a restraint device that offers the maximum your vehicle properly. your child in the event of an accident or
protection for their size and age. sudden stop.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial
requirements for child size and age that may
vary from the recommendations listed below.
 Children less than 1 year old and who

weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST
ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that
MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.

Airbag WARNING
 It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
4 port the weight of their head in the event
of an accident.
 When installing a child restraint system,
follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer and follow the directions in
this manual. Failure to do so can result in
WARNING WARNING serious injury or death to your child in an
 Your vehicle is also equipped with a front  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT accident or sudden stop.
passenger’s airbag. SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat  After installation, push and pull the child
Never put REAR-FACING CHILD whenever possible. If one must be used in restraint system back and forth, and side
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT the front passenger seat, move the seat to to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- the most rearward position and make sure the child restraint system is not installed
senger seat. This places the infant too the child stays in the child restraint sys- securely, it may cause injury to the child
close to the passenger’s airbag. During tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow or other occupants in the event of an acci-
deployment of that airbag, the infant can these instructions could result in serious dent or sudden stop.
be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing injury or death to the child.  When not in use, keep your child restraint
child restraint systems or infant restraint system secured with the seat belt, or
systems must only be used in the rear seat. remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.

NOTE Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations

 Before purchasing a child restraint system, tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418901230
try installing it in the rear seat to ensure Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the
proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt Anchors and Tethers for chil- rear shelf, located behind the top of your rear
buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it dren) system seat. These are for securing a child restraint
may be difficult to securely install some
manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
N00418801183 system tether strap to each of the 3 rear seat-
ing positions in your vehicle.
4
If the child restraint system can be pulled
forward or to either side easily on the seat
Lower anchor locations
cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
The outboard seating positions in the rear seat
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint
system.
of your vehicle are equipped with lower
Depending on the seating position in the anchors for attaching child restraint systems
vehicle and the child restraint system that compatible with the LATCH system.
you have, the child restraint system can be
attached using one of the following 2 meth-
ods:
• Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear
seat ONLY if the child restraint system is
compatible with the LATCH system (See
page 4-17).
• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-19).


3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the
Examples of child restraint sys- NOTE
child restraint system into the lower
tems compatible with the LATCH anchors (C) in accordance with the  In order to secure a child restraint system
system compatible with the LATCH system, you
instructions provided by the child restraint
must use the lower anchor points in the out-
N00419000202 system manufacturer. board positions of the rear seat. To secure a
Remember, the lower anchors provided child restraint system in the center position
4 with your vehicle are designed to secure of the rear seat, you must use the vehicle’s
suitable child restraint systems compat- center seat belt.
ible with the LATCH system in the out-
board positions of the rear seat only.
The anchor connectors are NOT WARNING
designed to secure a suitable child  If there is any foreign material in or
restraint system in the center position around the lower anchors, remove it
of the rear seat. before installing the child restraint sys-
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
from, not looped through or otherwise
A- Rear-facing child restraint system interfering with, the child restraint sys-
B- Front-facing child restraint system tem. If foreign matter is not removed
C- Child restraint system lower anchor and/or the seat belt interferes with the
connectors child restraint system, the child restraint
D- Tether strap system will not be secured properly, could
(These are only examples.) detach and move forward in the event of
sudden braking or an accident, and could
result in injury to the child or other vehi-
cle occupants.
Using the LATCH system
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
N00419101297
A- Vehicle seat cushion the seat where the child restraint system is
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, B- Vehicle seatback installed.
remove the head restraint from the loca- C- Lower anchor
tion where you wish to install the child D- Connector
restraint system. 4. Open the cover for the tether anchor by
2. Open the gap a little between the seat pulling it back with your hand as illus-
cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with trated below (4).
your hand to locate the lower anchors (C).


5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child
restraint system to the anchor (F) as illus-
Installing a child restraint sys- WARNING
trated below (5) and tighten the top tether tem using the seat belt (with  When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
strap so it is securely fastened. emergency/automatic locking retractor has been switched to the ALR
mechanism) child restraint installation function. The
ALR function will keep the child restraint
N00407301540
system tightly secured to the seat. 4
With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
Failure to convert the retractor to the
in all other seating positions can be converted ALR function may allow the child
from normal Emergency Locking Retractor restraint system to move forward during
(ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor sudden braking or an accident, resulting
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull in serious injury or death to the child or
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the other occupants.
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
installation function. Always use the ALR
6. Push and pull the child restraint system in child restraint installation function when you
all directions to ensure it is firmly install a child restraint system using the seat
secured. belt.
WARNING Children 12 years old and under should

always be restrained in the rear seat, when-
 Child restraint system tether anchors are
designed only to withstand loads from cor- ever possible, although the front passenger
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to the vehi-
cle.


3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-
WARNING Installation
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder
 Never remove the buckle (A) for the rear
1. Place the child restraint system on the seat part of the belt all the way out of the
center seat from the rubber belt (B). If the
where you wish to install it. retractor until it stops. Then let the belt
buckle is detached from the rubber belt,
the ALR mode may become deactivated To help assure proper fitting of the child feed back into the retractor.
and a child restraint system used in the restraint system, always remove the head
4 rear center seat position may not be restraint.
secured, resulting in serious injury or 2. Route the seat belt through the child
death to a child using the child restraint restraint system according to the instruc-
system and/or other occupants. Always tions provided by the child restraint sys-
make sure that the buckle is passed under
tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat
the rubber belt as shown in the illustration
below.
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
you hear a “click” when you insert the
latch plate into the buckle.
4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it.

If the belt is in the ALR function, you will
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR
function has not been activated and you
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.


5. After confirming that the belt is locked, 7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the 9. To remove a child restraint system from
grab the shoulder part of the belt near the child restraint system to the tether anchor the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,
buckle and pull up to remove any slack (B) as illustrated below (7) and tighten the remove the child from the restraint.
from the lap part of the belt allowing the top tether strap so it is securely fastened. Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, from the restraint and let the belt fully
if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child retract.
restraint system will not be secure. It may 10. Reinstall the head restraint. 4
help to put your weight on the child Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-5.
restraint system and/or push on its seat-
back while pulling up on the belt (See
Children who have outgrown
illustration).
child restraint systems
N00407601686
Children who have outgrown a child restraint

system should be seated in the rear seat and
wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
WARNING their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses
 Child restraint system tether anchors are their stomach, a commercially available
designed only to withstand loads from cor- booster seat must be used to raise the child so
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder
no circumstances are they to be used for
and the lap belt remains positioned low
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to the vehi-
across their hips. The booster seat should fit
If your child restraint system requires the use cle. the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle
accordance with the following procedures. Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint
8. Before putting your child in the restraint,
Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
push and pull the restraint in all directions
6. Open the cover from the tether anchor tions.
to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
installation point by pulling it back with before each use. If the child restraint sys-
your hand as illustrated below (6). tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1
through 7.

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or
WARNING severe fading from sunlight. All of these con- Supplemental Restraint Sys-
 Any child who is too small to properly
wear a seat belt must be properly
ditions indicate a weakening of the belt, tem (SRS) - airbag
which may adversely affect seat belt perfor- N00407701850
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint system, to reduce their risk of mance in an accident. This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
serious injury or death in an accident. Restraint System (SRS), which includes air-
4  A child should never be left unattended in, WARNING bags for the driver and passengers.
or unsupervised around, your vehicle.  Do not attempt to repair or replace any
When you leave the vehicle, always take part of the seat belt assemblies. This work The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-
the child out as well. should be done by an authorized ment the primary protection of the driver and
 Children can die from heat stroke if left or Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have front passenger seat belt systems by provid-
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer ing those occupants with protection against
hot days. perform the work could reduce the effec- head and chest injuries in certain moderate to
 Keep your vehicle locked and the trunk lid tiveness of the belts and could result in a severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air-
closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle serious injury or death in an accident. bags, together with sensors at the front of the
keys away from children.  Never use an organic solvent to clean the vehicle and sensors attached to the front
 Never allow children to play in the trunk seat belt webbing. Do not attempt to
seats, form an advanced airbag system.
of your vehicle. bleach or re-dye the seat belt webbing.
These may weaken the seat belt webbing,
The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to
increasing risk of injury or death in an
supplement the primary protection of the
accident.
Maintenance and inspection Clean seat belt webbing only with mild driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the
of seat belts soap or detergent solution and rinse it forward movement of the driver’s lower legs
N00407001404 with lukewarm water, and dry the seat and provide increased overall body protection
belt webbing completely before retracting in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-
Regularly check your seat belt buckles and it. sions.
their release mechanisms for positive engage-
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags
retractors for automatic locking when in the are also designed to supplement the seat belts.
Automatic Locking Retractor function. The SRS side airbags provide the driver and
front passenger with protection against chest
The entire seat belt assembly should be injuries by deploying the bag on the side
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious impacted in moderate to severe side impact
cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec- collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

the driver and passengers on the front seat
and rear outboard seat with protection against
WARNING WARNING
• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas- • Airbags inflate very quickly and with
head injuries by deploying the curtain airbag
sengers properly positioned. This great force. If the driver and front pas-
on the side impacted in moderate to severe
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, senger are not properly seated and
side impact collisions and by deploying both and reduces the risk of serious injuries or restrained, the airbag may not provide
curtain airbags when a rollover is detected. death when the airbags inflate. the proper protection, and can cause
The curtain airbags are also designed to help During sudden braking just before a col- serious injuries or death when it inflates. 4
reduce the risk of complete and partial ejec- lision, an unrestrained or improperly • To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
tion from the vehicle through side windows restrained driver or passengers can move injury or death due to a deploying
in both side impact and rollover type acci- forward into direct contact with, or driver’s airbag, always properly wear
dents. within close proximity to, the airbag your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
when it begins to inflate. as far back as possible, maintaining a
The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use The beginning stage of airbag inflation is position that still allows the driver to
of the seat belts. For maximum protection in the most forceful and can cause serious have good control of the steering wheel,
all types of accidents, seat belts must injuries or death if the occupant comes in brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
contact with the airbag at this time. trols.
ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in • To reduce the risk to the front passenger
rides in this vehicle (with infants and small
rear impact collisions, and in lower- of serious injury or death from a deploy-
children in an appropriate child restraint sys- speed frontal collisions because the air- ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
tem in the rear seat, and older children buck- bags are not designed to inflate in those passenger always wears the seat belt
led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint situations. properly, remains seated upright and all
systems” on page 4-14. • Seat belts reduce the risk of being the way back in the seat, and positions
thrown from your vehicle in a collision or the seat as far back as possible.
WARNING rollover. • Seat all infants and children in the rear
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP- seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY ERLY SEATED. ate child restraint system.
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG. • A driver or front passenger sitting too  Airbags inflate very quickly and with
close to the steering wheel or instrument great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
panel during airbag deployment can be seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
seriously injured or killed. the instrument panel, or lean your head or
chest close to the steering wheel or the
instrument panel.
 Do not put your feet or legs on or against
the instrument panel.

Airbag
WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Infants and small children should never  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in
held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to
can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passenger’s airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure
accident, especially when the airbags deployment of that airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys-
inflate. Seat all infants and children in the be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
rear seat, properly restrained in an appro- Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
priate child restraint system. Refer to infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
“Child restraint systems” on page 4-14. in the rear seat.


7- Passenger’s seat occupant classifica- The airbags will operate under the same con-
WARNING tion sensor system ditions as the airbag control unit.
 Older children should be seated in the
8- Airbag module (Driver’s knee)
rear seat with their seat belt properly When the impact sensors detect a sufficient
worn, and with an appropriate booster 9- Airbag control unit
front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),
seat if needed.
the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems” on page 4-21. 4
When the airbag control unit detects rollover
of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be
deployed.
How the Supplemental
Restraint System works When airbags deploy, some smoke is released
N00407801587
accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
The SRS includes the following components: not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
tion to people with respiratory problems.
10- Front impact sensors
11- Side impact sensors An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you
12- Curtain airbag modules may not even notice that the airbag was
inflated.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
of the electronic parts of the system whenever and does not prevent people from leaving the
the ignition switch or the operation mode is vehicle.
under the following conditions. These include
all of the items listed above and all related
1- Airbag module (Driver) wiring. CAUTION
[Except for vehicles equipped with the  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
2- Passenger’s airbag off indicator
F.A.S.T.-key] force. In certain situations, contact with an
3- SRS warning light inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
4- Airbag module (Passenger) The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
sions, and bruises.
5- Side airbag modules “START” position.
6- Driver’s seat position sensor [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]


“SRS warning light” on page 4-28.
Event Data Recording NOTE
N00418600256  EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
This vehicle is equipped with an event data if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data WARNING
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-  If the SRS warning light comes on, have
recorder (EDR).
ing conditions and no personal data (e.g., the vehicle inspected by an authorized
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi-
name, gender, age, and crash location) are
4 certain crash or near crash-like situations, recorded. However, other parties, such as ble.
such as an airbag deployment or hitting a law enforcement, could combine the EDR  Please observe the following instructions
road obstacle, data that will assist in under- data with the type of personally identifying to ensure that the driver’s seat position
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. data routinely acquired during a crash inves- sensor can operate correctly.
The EDR is designed to record data related to tigation. • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a and sit well back against the seatback.
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or To read data recorded by an EDR, special Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-2.
less. equipment is required, and access to the vehi- • Do not recline the seatback more than
necessary when driving.
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record • Do not place metallic objects or luggage
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
such data as: under the front seat.
law enforcement, that have the special equip-
 If the vehicle is involved in a severe
 How various systems in your vehicle were ment, can read the information if they have
impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by
operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
 Whether or not the driver and front pas- soon as possible.
senger safety belts were buckled/fastened; Driver’s seat position sensor
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress- N00417900223
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
The driver’s seat position sensor is attached Passenger’s seat occupant clas-
and, sification sensor system
to the seat rail and provides the airbag control
 How fast the vehicle was traveling.
unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft N00418000364
position. The airbag control unit controls The passenger’s seat occupant classification
These data can help provide a better under-
deployment of the driver’s front airbag in sensor system is attached to the front passen-
standing of the circumstances in which
accordance with the information it receives ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-
crashes and injuries occur.
from this sensor. trol unit with information regarding the
If there is a problem involving the driver’s occupant on the front passenger seat. The air-
seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in bag control unit controls deployment of the
the instrument panel will come on. Refer to

passenger’s front airbag in accordance with
the information it receives from this system.
WARNING WARNING
• The SRS warning light comes on while • If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it
The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
you are driving. and dry the seat immediately.
in an impact when the system senses no occu-
 To ensure that the passenger’s seat occu-  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
pant on the front passenger seat or a child in a
pant classification sensor system can sense impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
child restraint system. In this case, the pas-
senger’s airbag off indicator will illuminate.
correctly, observe the following instruc-
tions. Failure to follow these instructions
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
4
Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on can adversely affect the performance of
page 4-27. the passenger’s airbag system.
If there is a problem involving the passen- • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
Passenger’s airbag off indicator
ger’s seat occupant classification sensor sys- and sit well back against the seatback. N00418101359
tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-2. The passenger’s airbag off indicator is
panel will come on. • Do not recline the seatback more than located at shown in the illustration.
Refer to “SRS warning light” page 4-28. necessary.
• Never have more than one person (adult
or child) sitting on the seat.
WARNING • Do not place anything between the seat
 If any of the following conditions occur, and the floor console.
you should immediately have your vehicle • When attaching a child restraint system,
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi secure it firmly.
Motors dealer as soon as possible:
• Do not place luggage or other objects on
• The SRS warning light does not initially the seat.
come on when the ignition switch or the
• Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
operation mode is under the following
• Do not modify or replace the seat and
conditions.
seat belt.
• [Except for vehicles equipped with the
• Do not place luggage or other objects
F.A.S.T.-key] The indicator normally comes on when the
under the seat.
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
“START” position. • Do not place and use an electronic device
such as a computer on the seat. or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes
• Do not place heavy objects on the seat or out a few seconds later. In the following situ-
stick pins, needles, or other objects into ations, the indicator will stay on to show that
• The SRS warning light does not go out
after several seconds. it. the passenger front airbag is not operational.
• Do not remove the seat cushion skin.
 The front passenger seat is not occupied.

 The system senses that a child is using a If there is a problem involving one or more of
child restraint system on the front passen-
WARNING the SRS components, the warning light will
 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
ger seat. come on and stay on.
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off
The SRS warning light is shared by the SRS
indicator difficult or impossible to see.
When the passenger’s seat occupant classifi- airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system.
You must be able to see the passenger’s
cation sensor system senses there is a person airbag off indicator and verify the status
4 seated in the front passenger seat, the indica- of the passenger’s airbag system. WARNING
tor goes out to show that the passenger’s front
 If any of the following conditions occur,
airbag is operational.
SRS warning light there may be a problem with the SRS air-
bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
N00408300579
WARNING they may not function properly in a colli-
There is a Supplemental Restraint System sion or may suddenly activate without a
 If any of the following conditions occur,
you should immediately have the airbag (SRS) warning light on the instrument panel. collision:
system in your vehicle inspected by an • Even when the ignition switch or the
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
soon as possible: ing light does not come on or it remains
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator on.
comes on when an adult is sitting on the • The SRS warning light comes on while
front passenger seat. driving.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
not come on when the front passenger sioners are designed to help reduce the
seat is not occupied. risk of serious injury or death in certain
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does collisions. If either of the above conditions
not come on when the ignition switch is occurs, immediately have your vehicle
turned to the “ON” position or the oper- checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
ation mode is put in ON. Motors dealer.
The system checks itself every time the igni-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when a child is in a child
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
restraint system on the front passenger the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS Driver’s and passenger’s front
seat. warning light will come on for several sec-
onds and then go out. This is normal and airbag system
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator
N00407900321
comes on and goes out repeatedly. means the system is working properly.
The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.

The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-
ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front
passenger seat is not occupied or when the 4
system senses that a child is in the child
restraint system.
Driver
Front passenger
Driver’s knee airbag system

N00404500036
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
designed to deploy at the same time as the
driver’s front airbag.

Deployment of front airbags

N00408001658
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …
4 Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main rail).
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical structure is above a specific threshold level. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
condition is shown in the illustration to the The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful, and can cause serious injury or
left. (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a death if you are too close to the deploying air-
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If bag. Accordingly, it is important that you
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is always wear the available seat belt.
designed to deploy only in certain moderate below this threshold level, the front airbags
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
area between the arrows in the illustration to threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
the right. cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,


they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
pants.
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY object
Some typical situations are shown in the
when … illustration.
In certain types of front collisions, the front Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-
airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not bag do not protect the occupants in all types 4
deploy, even if the deformation of the body of collisions, be sure to always wear the your
Collision where the vehicle slides under the
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body seat belts properly.
rear body of a truck
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants. Rear end collision to your vehicle
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Oblique frontal impact
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-
bag do not protect the occupant in all types of Side collision to your vehicle
frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your
seat belts properly.
The front airbags and driver’s Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

The front airbags and driver’s Collision with an elevated median/island or

knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when curb
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

4 may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
carriage impact). Some typical situations are
shown in the illustration.
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag may deploy in certain types of unex- WARNING
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,  Do not attach accessories to, or put them
and these unexpected impacts can move you Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the in front of, the windshield. They could
ground restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
out of position, it is important to always wear
your seat belts properly. When worn properly, injure an occupant, when the airbag
seat belts can help maintain your distance inflates.
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.  Do not attach additional keys or accesso-
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the
The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent
most forceful and can cause serious injury or the driver’s knee airbag from inflating
death if you are close to the deploying airbag. normally or could be propelled to cause
serious injury if the airbag inflates.
WARNING  Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
 Do not attach anything to the steering tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate- Such objects could prevent the driver’s
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and knee airbag from inflating normally or
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. could be propelled to cause serious injury
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything if the airbag inflates.
to, the instrument panel above the glove
compartment. Such items could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

Side airbag system Curtain airbag system

N00408100421 N00419201302
The side airbags (A) are contained in the The curtain airbags are contained in the front
driver and front passenger seatbacks. pillars and roof side rail.
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, 4
with no passenger in the front seat. even with no passenger in the seat.
Also, when the airbag control unit detects
rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags
will deploy.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
semble or repair the SRS airbags.
 Do not place objects, such as packages or
pets, between the airbags and the driver
or the front passenger. Such objects can
adversely affect airbag performance, or
cause serious injury or death when the
airbag deploys. A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-
 Immediately after airbag inflation, some cles equipped with side airbags.
parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
not touch them. You could otherwise be
burned. WARNING
 The airbag system is designed to work  The side airbags and curtain airbags can
only once. After the airbags deploy, they cause serious injury or death to anyone
will not work again. They must promptly too close to the airbag when it deploys. To
be replaced and the entire airbag system reduce the risk of injury from a deploying
must be inspected by an authorized side airbag and curtain airbag, all occu-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. pants must be properly restrained and
seated well back, upright, and in the mid-
dle of the seat. Do not lean against the
door.

WARNING WARNING
 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any  Never install a rear-facing child restraint
other object around the part where the system in the front passenger seat. Rear-
curtain airbag deploys, such as on the facing child restraint systems MUST
windshield, side door glass or front and ONLY be used in the rear seat.
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the
4 curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or
 Front-facing child restraint systems
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.
other object may be hurled with great If a front-facing child restraint system
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate must be used in the front passenger seat,
correctly, resulting in death or serious move the seat as far back as possible, and
injury. make sure that the child stays in the child
restraint system, properly restrained and
WARNING away from the door.
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from  Do not allow a child to lean against or sit
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any close to the passenger door, even if the
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back child is seated in a child restraint system.
of either front seat. Special care should be The child’s head should also not lean
taken with children. against or be close to the section of the
 Do not place any objects around the area seatback where the side airbag and cur-
where the side airbags deploy. Such tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if
objects can interfere with proper side air- the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.
bag deployment, and cause injury during Failure to follow all of these instructions
deployment of the side airbag. could lead to serious injury or death to the
 Do not place stickers, labels or additional child.
trim on the back of either front seat. They  Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
can interfere with proper side airbag WARNING airbag or curtain airbag components
deployment.  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats should be done only by an authorized
that have side airbags. Covers can inter- Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk
fere with proper side airbag deployment of a serious injury or death. Improper
and adversely affect side airbag perfor- work methods can cause accidental side
mance. airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or
render a side airbag or curtain airbag
inoperable. Either of these situations
could result in serious injury or death.


The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
Deployment of side airbag and mary means of protection in an accident. The Side impact in an area away from the passenger
curtain airbag SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are
compartment
N00408201588 designed to provide additional protection.
Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all
The side airbag and curtain airbag occupants, be sure to always wear your seat
ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY belts properly. 4
when...
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle colli-
The side airbag and curtain airbag sion with the side of vehicle
The side airbag and curtain airbag are MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
moderate to severe side impact to the middle In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
of the passenger compartment. bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
Also when the vehicle detects rollover of the if the deformation of the body seems to be
vehicle, the curtain air bags will deploy. large, because the vehicle’s body structure is Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
Typical situations are shown in the illustra- designed to absorb the impact and to deform object
tion. in order to help protect the occupants. There
are also cases where the side airbag and cur-
Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,
vehicle body’s side structure depending on the location of the impact.
Some typical situations where the side air-
bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are
shown in the illustrations on the following
page.
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do

When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle
not protect the occupant in all types of side
(Curtain airbag only)
collisions, be sure to always wear the seat
belts properly.

Oblique side impact Head-on collision SRS servicing

N00408501754
WARNING
 Any maintenance performed on or near
4 the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag to do any service, inspection, maintenance
only) or repair on any SRS components or wir-
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should
ever be handled, removed or disposed by
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi
Pitch end over end Motors dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
dental airbag deployment or could make
The side airbag and curtain airbag the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO tions could result in serious injury or
death.
DEPLOY when...
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any
other SRS component or related vehicle
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not part. For example, replacement of the
designed to deploy in situations where they steering wheel, or modifications to the
cannot provide protection to the occupants. front bumper or body structure can
Some typical situations are shown in the adversely affect SRS performance and
illustration. may lead to injury.
 If your vehicle has received any damage,
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do you should have the SRS inspected by an
not protect the occupant in all types of colli- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
sions, be sure to always wear your seat belts make sure it is in proper working order.
properly.

WARNING NOTE [For vehicles sold in Puerto

 Do not modify your front seats, center pil- • Steering wheel Rico]
lar or center console. Such modifications • Instrument panel To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales
can adversely affect SRS performance and of Caribbean, Inc.
may lead to injury. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
Also, if you discover any tear or open call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
seam in the seat fabric near the side air-
To contact Mitsubishi Motors
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 4
North America, Inc.
bag, have the seat inspected by an autho- Caribbean, Inc.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
Customer Service Department
 If you have found any scratch, crack or Mitsubishi Motors North Amer-
damage to the portion of the front and P.O. Box 192216
ica, Inc.
rear pillars and roof side rail, you should SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
have the SRS inspected by an authorized Customer Relations Depart-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. ment
P.O. Box 6400
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
NOTE
 When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
to another person, we urge you to alert the [For vehicles sold in Canada]
new owner that it is equipped with the SRS To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales
and refer that owner to the applicable sec- of Canada, Inc.
tions in this owner’s manual.
call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
 If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,
we urge you to first take it to an authorized Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can ada, Inc.
be made safe for disposal. Customer Relations Depart-
 If any of the following parts needs to be
modified for use by a handicapped person,
ment
the advanced airbag system will be greatly P.O. Box 41009
affected. Please consult an authorized 4141 Dixie Road
Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt

Warning label
N00408600383
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS

are located in the vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
4
* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.

Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-2 Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) ..........................5-58
Keys .................................................................................................5-2 Rear-view camera (if so equipped).................................................5-61
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-3 Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-63 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-6 Multi-information display .............................................................5-64
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) Indicator and warning light package .............................................5-74
(if so equipped) ............................................................................5-9 Indicators .......................................................................................5-75
Door locks ......................................................................................5-24 Warning lights ................................................................................5-75
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-25 Combination headlights and dimmer switch .................................5-78
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-26 Turn signal lever ............................................................................5-80
Trunk lid ........................................................................................5-27 Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-81
Inside emergency trunk lid release ................................................5-28 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ..........................................5-81
Manual window control (if so equipped)........................................5-29 Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-81
Power window control ...................................................................5-29 Electric rear window defogger switch ...........................................5-83
Parking brake .................................................................................5-32 Horn switch ...................................................................................5-84
Steering wheel height adjustment ..................................................5-33 Link System (if so equipped) .........................................................5-84
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-33 USB input terminal ........................................................................5-84
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-35 Sun visors ......................................................................................5-85
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-36 12 V power outlets .........................................................................5-86
Starting the engine .........................................................................5-37 HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) .................5-86
Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-39 Interior lights .................................................................................5-91
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-41 Storage spaces ................................................................................5-92
Service brake .................................................................................5-46 Cup holders ....................................................................................5-93
Hill start assist ................................................................................5-47 Bottle holders .................................................................................5-94
Brake assist system ........................................................................5-48 Convenience hook .........................................................................5-94
Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-49 Assist grips ....................................................................................5-95
Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................5-50
Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-51
Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-54
Break-in recommendations
Break-in recommendations Keys

N00508701382 N00508801703
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
5 mance and economy of your vehicle by
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
observing the following precautions during

the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and
the break-in period. keyless entry system
2- Key number plate
 Avoid revving the engine.
 Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts,
sudden acceleration, prolonged high- Type 3
speed driving and sudden braking. These
would have a detrimental effect on the Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys
engine and also cause increased fuel and are provided.
oil consumption, which could result in 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer
Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency
malfunction of the engine components. Be 2- Key number plate
key in a safe place together as a set of spare
particularly careful to avoid full accelera- keys.
tion while in low shift position (low
gears). Type 2
 Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within
the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
precautions” on page 6-10.) Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
5-2 Features and controls

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
NOTE NOTE
• Keep away from devices that produce mag-  When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-
netism, such as audio systems, computers tional status, the alarm operates if a door is
and televisions. opened after using the key, the door lock
• Keep away from devices that emit strong knob or the power door lock switch to unlock
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular the vehicle.
phones, wireless devices and high fre-  The system does not enter the preparation
quency equipment (including medical
devices).
status if the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-
5
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. cle.
• Do not leave the key where it may be
1- F.A.S.T.-key
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
(with electronic immobilizer and key- ity.
Electronic immobilizer
less entry system function)  If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of (Anti-theft starting system)
2- Emergency key the vehicle immediately contact an autho- N00509100780
3- Key number plate rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer of the key number, they can Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
NOTE make a new key. The key number is stamped key)]
 The keyless entry key and F.A.S.T.-key are a on the key number plate. Keep the key num- For information on operations for vehicles
precision electronic device with a built-in ber plate in a safe place separate from the equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
signal transmitter. Please observe the follow- key itself. rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
ing in order to prevent damage.  No keys other than those registered in “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
• Do not leave where it may be exposed to advance can be used to start the engine. (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft theft starting system)” on page 5-19.
top of the dashboard. starting system)” on page 5-3.
• Do not take the remote control transmitter Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security [Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
apart. Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic hand Advanced Security Transmitter
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on (F.A.S.T.-key)]
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject
page 5-19.
it to strong impacts. The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
• Keep the remote control transmitter dry. nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
• Keep away from magnetic objects such as theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
key rings. bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
Features and controls 5-3


attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
NOTE
 A system failure is suspected when the igni-
a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi-
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
electronics. Motors dealer.
5 NOTE
 In the following cases, the vehicle may not CAUTION
be able to recognize the registered ID code  Do not make any alterations or additions to
from the key. This means the engine will not the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi-
start even when the key is turned to the tions could cause failure of the immobilizer.
“START” position.
• When the key contacts a key ring or other
metallic or magnetic object (Type A) Replacement keys
• When the key grip contacts metal of
another key (Type B)
• When the key contacts or is close to other
Only keys that have been programmed to the
immobilizer keys (including keys of other vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the
vehicles) (Type C) vehicle.
 In cases like the above, move the offending
object(s) away from the key and turn the key If you lose the key, you can order a key from
back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
try to start the engine again. If the engine NOTE referring to the key number.
does not start, contact an authorized To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
 The key may not operate properly when it is
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. near an object or facility that emits strong vehicle keys must be changed.
electromagnetic waves. Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
 Electronic immobilizer is not compatible your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
with commercially available remote starting have your ID code changed.
systems. Use of commercially available
remote starting systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection.


your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors
Additional keys dealer) by doing the following:
NOTE
 When the key registration is completed, the
To add a key, you must already have 2 regis- 1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition immobilizer indicator will come on within 3
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi- seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
tered keys. You need to register the ID code
“ON” position with the blank immobilizer
to the vehicle. tion for 5 seconds.
key (specially cut for your vehicle at your
Registering the ID code can be done by your- 2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and Mitsubishi Motors dealer).
self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or remove the first key.
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first 5
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- key, insert the second valid key into the 5. If you wish to register another key, per-
low the “Customer key programming” proce- ignition and turn it to the “ON” position. form the process again from step 1.
dure below. About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer
If you choose to have your authorized indicator will start to blink. NOTE
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID 4. When the immobilizer indicator starts  It is not possible to register a key if:
code, take your vehicle and all remaining blinking, turn the second valid key to the • the immobilizer indicator goes off during
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors “OFF” position and remove it. Within 30 the procedure
dealer. seconds after doing so, insert a blank • the immobilizer indicator does not come on
immobilizer key into the ignition switch within 30 seconds after step 4.
NOTE and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform  The procedure will be terminated automati-
this operation no more than 30 seconds cally if:
 You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
after the immobilizer indicator starts • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
register up to 8 keys.
blinking. When registration of the ID from the moment when the first key is
code is complete, the immobilizer indica- turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
when the second key is turned to the “ON”
tor will come on for 3 seconds then go off.
Customer key programming If an error occurs, the immobilizer indica-
position
(Except for vehicles sold in tor will go off during the procedure.
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
from the moment when the second key is
Canada) turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
N00562201178 when the blank immobilizer key is turned
You can program new keys to the system if to the “ON” position
you have two valid (already registered) keys • more than 20 seconds elapses after the
and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for immobilizer indicator starts blinking

General information Keyless entry system (if so NOTE

N00562300097  If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the
equipped)
Your electronic immobilizer operates on a horn will sound once.
N00509002057
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
Press the remote control transmitter buttons
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
to lock or unlock the doors. To unlock
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
It can also help you signal for attention by
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
5 device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules
setting off the panic alarm.
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS driver’s door only.
standard(s). Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
Operation is subject to the following two con- button one more time to unlock all the doors.
ditions. The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
 This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
 This device must accept any interference NOTE
received, including interference that may  If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and no
cause undesired operation of this device. door or tailgate is opened within approxi-
mately 30 seconds, relocking will automati-
cally occur.
WARNING 1- LOCK ( ) button  The amount of time after unlocking until the
 Changes or modifications not expressly 2- UNLOCK ( ) button vehicle relocks automatically can be
approved by the party responsible for adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
3- PANIC button
compliance could void the user’s authority Motors dealer for details.
4- Indicator light
to operate the equipment.
To lock Answerback function
The horn of the keyless entry system answer-

Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
back function can be changed as required.
doors.
This is done with the key removed from the
The turn signal lights will also blink once.
ignition switch.


If you lose the remote control transmitter, you
NOTE Turn signal lights deactiva-
can order a remote control transmitter from
 The answerback function will not operate if tion/reactivation your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
any of the doors are open.
referring to the key number.
The turn signal lights answerback function To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
can be changed. remote control transmitter must be changed.
Horn deactivation/reactivation If you want to change the answerback func- Take your vehicle and all remote control
tion, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi
The answerback function can be set in the Motors dealer. Motors dealer to have your ID code changed.
5
following three ways.
Each time the answerback function is set, a
chime will sound to tell you the condition of
Using the panic alarm Additional remote control
the answerback function.
N00543700034
transmitters
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- N00543900078
One chime: The horn will not sound. ened, you may acti-vate the alarm to call To add a remote control transmitter, you must
Two chimes: The horn will sound. attention as follows: already have 1 registered remote control
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the transmitter.
LOCK button is pressed twice 1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
1 second. Registering the ID code can be done by your
within 1 second. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
2. The headlights will blink on and off and
the horn will sound intermittently for Take your vehicle and any remaining keys to
about 3 minutes. your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
bination headlights and dimmer switch to the remote control transmitter. NOTE
the “OFF” position.  You are provided with 2 remote control
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- transmitters, but you may register up to 4
Replacement remote control remote control transmitters.
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
during this time.
transmitters
N00543801090
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of Only remote control transmitters pro- General information
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can N00546100114
lock or unlock all doors. Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communica-


tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
NOTE
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan- open the remote control transmitter case, the
dard(s). buttons may come out.
Operation is subject to the following two con-  The Federal Communications Commission
ditions.
5 (FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC)
number and the model number (radio certifi-
 This device may not cause harmful inter- cation) are indicated in the illustrated posi-
ference. tion.
 This device must accept any interference
3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
received, including interference that may
insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade
cause undesired operation of this device.
screwdriver into the notch in the remote
control transmitter case and use it to open
WARNING the case.
 Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
4. Remove the old battery.
5. Install a new battery with the + side (B)
Procedure for replacing the up.
remote control transmitter bat-
tery
N00544101191
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

electricity from your body by touching a
metal grounded object.
2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote
control transmitter.

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Free-hand Advanced Secu- WARNING

+ side
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-  Individuals who use implantable pace-
makers or implantable cardiovascular-
key) (if so equipped) defibrillators should keep away from the
- side external and internal transmitters. The
N00503101150
electromagnetic waves used in the
Coin type The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of
battery ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors to be
locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be
implantable pacemakers and implantable
cardiovascular-defibrillators.
5
CR1620
opened, and the engine to be started and the
operation mode to be changed simply by car-
6. Close the remote control transmitter rying it.
firmly. The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2. remote control transmitter of the keyless
8. Check the keyless entry system to see that entry system.
it works. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry
system” on page 5-21.
CAUTION
 When the remote control transmitter case is
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for
nents. vehicle operations such as locking and
unlocking the doors, starting the engine,
and changing the operation mode. When
NOTE leaving the vehicle, make sure you are A- External transmitter
 You may purchase a replacement battery at carrying the F.A.S.T.-key and then lock B- Internal transmitter
an electric appliance store. the vehicle.
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
replace the battery for you if you prefer.

WARNING NOTE Operating range of the

 Individuals using other electro-medical • The key is carried together with other com- F.A.S.T.-key
apparatus besides implantable pacemak- munication devices such as cellular phones N00503201223
ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi- or radios, or electrical appliances such as
brillators should check with the computers When a person enters the operating range of
manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm • The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-
the effect of the electromagnetic waves metal object key and presses the driver’s door lock/unlock
switch the trunk lid switch, verification of the
5 used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag-
netic waves may affect the operations of
• A keyless entry system is being used
nearby ID code is performed.
the electro-medical apparatus. • The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down The doors can only be locked and unlocked,
• The vehicle is in a location with strong the trunk lid can only be opened, the engine
The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.- electromagnetic waves or noise can only be started and the operation mode
key can be modified as stated below. Use the emergency key in such circum- can only be changed when the ID codes of the
(Keyless entry operations are possible.) stances. vehicle and F.A.S.T.-key match.
For details, contact an authorized Refer to “To operate without using the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-19.
• Enabling only the locking and unlocking  The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
reception operations in its communication
of the doors and the opening of the trunk
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
lid is always running down, regardless of how
• Enabling only the starting of the engine often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
• Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key life is about 1 to 2 years, depending on the
usage conditions.
NOTE  Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-
ing reception operations, the reception of
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic
strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate
waves.
the running down of the battery. Do not place
In cases such as the following, operation
near to electrical appliances such as televi-
may be improper or unstable.
sions or computers. NOTE
• The vehicle is near a facility that emits  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV down or there are strong electromagnetic
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio waves or noise in the area, the operating
station or an airport range could decrease or operations could
become unstable.

Operating range for locking and NOTE NOTE

unlocking the doors and opening  If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-
the trunk lid range, even a person not carrying the ing range, it may not be possible to start the
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors engine and change the operation mode if the
or open the trunk lid by pressing the driver’s key is in a storage space such as the glove
The operating range is within about 2.3 feet door switch or the trunk lid switch. compartment, on top of the instrument panel,
(70 cm) of the driver’s door lock/unlock or in the door pocket or luggage compart-
switch and the trunk lid switch.
Operating range for starting the ment.
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,
5
engine and changing the opera- it may not be possible to start the engine and
tion mode change the operation mode if the key is too
N00503301093 close to a door or door window.
The operating range is the interior of the
vehicle.
To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key
N00503401339
To lock
*: Front of the vehicle
: Operating range While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the
driver’s door switch (A) or the trunk lid
switch (B) within the operating range to lock
NOTE all the doors and trunk lid.
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.- The turn signal lights will blink once and the
key is too close to the windshield, door win- *: Front of the vehicle buzzer will sound once.
dows or trunk lid. : Operating range
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3 Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door
feet (70 cm) of the driver’s door switch or locks” and “Trunk lid” on pages 5-24, 5-25
the trunk lid switch, the system may not and 5-27 respectively.
operate if the key is close to the ground or in
a high position.

Driver’s door To unlock NOTE

 Settings can be changed so that all the doors
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the are unlocked automatically by pressing the
operating range, you can unlock the doors by driver’s door switch once.
using the F.A.S.T.-key. See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will blink twice and the
5 buzzer will sound twice.
To open the trunk lid
Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door N00590900027
locks” on pages 5-24 and 5-25 respectively. Press the trunk lid switch (B) to open the
Trunk lid switch trunk lid.
Press the driver’s door switch (A) to unlock
only the driver’s door.
Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s Trunk lid switch
door switch one more time to unlock all the
doors.
Driver’s switch
NOTE
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
key does not operate. NOTE
• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger  If the doors are unlocked using the driver’s
compartment door switch when all doors are locked and no
• A door is open or ajar doors are opened within about 30 seconds,
• The operation mode is not in OFF. the doors will automatically re-lock.
 The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.


While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine
NOTE switch can be used to start the engine.
NOTE
 The amount of time after unlocking until the  When operating the engine switch, press the
vehicle relocks automatically can be switch all the way in. If the switch is not
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
Motors dealer for details. operation mode may not change. If the
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
key does not operate. need to hold the engine switch down.
• A door is open or ajar 5
• The operation mode is not in OFF.
 Functions settings can be modified as stated Operation mode of the engine
below. switch and its function
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
• Activating the operation confirmation func- OFF
tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only
during locking, or only during unlocking. CAUTION The indicator light on the engine switch turns
• Deactivating the operation confirmation  The indicator light (A) will flash orange off.
function (blinking of the turn signal lights) when there is a problem or malfunction in On vehicles equipped with continuously vari-
and buzzer. Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter. able transmission (CVT), the operation mode
• Modifying the number of blinks in the Never drive if the indicator light on the cannot be put in OFF when the selector lever
operation confirmation function (blinking engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi-
is in any position other than the “P” (PARK)
of the turn signal lights). ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi
position.
Motors dealer.
• Making the buzzer sound when the
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger  If the engine switch operation is not smooth
compartment when all the doors are closed. and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the ACC
switch.
Immediately contact an authorized Allows operation of some electrical accesso-
Engine switch Mitsubishi Motors dealer. ries.
N00513500088 The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys minates orange.
other than those registered in advance can be
used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi- ON
lizer function)
All electrical accessories can be used.


The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
ACC power auto-cutout function
minates green.
N00568101049
The indicator light turns off when the engine
is running. When the vehicle is in ACC operation mode
for approximately 30 minutes, the ACC
power auto-cutout function automatically
NOTE cuts power to the audio system and other
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic electronic devices that can be used during
5 immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
ACC operation mode.
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
To enable power after ACC power auto-cut-
one registered to the immobilizer computer.
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft out function, press the engine switch while in
starting system)” on page 5-19) ACC.
CAUTION
 When the engine is not running, put the oper- NOTE
Changing the operation mode ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation  It is possible to modify the functions as fol-
N00568000025
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when lows:
the engine is not running may cause the bat-
If you press the engine switch without press- • The time until the power cuts out can be
tery to be discharged, making it impossible
ing the brake pedal {continuously variable changed to approximately 60 minutes.
to start the engine.
transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal • The ACC power auto-cutout function can
 When the battery is disconnected, the current
be deactivated.
(manual transaxle) while the vehicle is sta- operation mode is memorized. After recon-
For details, we recommend you to consult an
tionary, you can change the operation mode necting the battery, the memorized mode is
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. selected automatically. Before disconnect-
ing the battery for repair or replacement,
make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
Be careful if you are not sure which opera- Warning activation
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery N00503501239
is run down.
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given
 The operation mode cannot be changed from
through buzzers and displayed symbols in
OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not
detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper- order to prevent mistaken operations or vehi-
ating range for starting the engine and cle theft.
changing the operation mode” on page 5-11. When a warning operates, be sure to check
the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is


also shown if there is a problem in the Someone may be carrying a When the operation mode is in any mode
F.A.S.T.-key. F.A.S.T.-key with a different other than OFF, and a door is opened and the
ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
If the following warning shows, contact an compartment the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-
may not be within the operat-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. key and the vehicle can no longer be verified.
ing range
When the door is closed, the warning light
Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-
There is a problem in the blinks and the buzzer sounds 4 times as a
out monitoring system” on
F.A.S.T.-key warning. If the vehicle starts, the inner buzzer
page 5-15. sounds once.
5
Put the operation mode in
The battery of the F.A.S.T.-
OFF and then start the engine
again.
key is run down NOTE
If the warning is not can-  The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system
celled, there is a fault in the does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is
 All the doors cannot be locked even when
removed through a window without opening
electronic immobilizer (Anti- the driver’s door switch is pressed.
a door.
theft starting system). This setting can be changed.
Please contact an authorized See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
Refer to “Key lock-in preven-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. for details.
tion system” on page 5-15.
 The warning may display even if the
If the following warnings show, the light goes Refer to “Door ajar preven- F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for
off if the correct action is taken. tion system” on page 5-16. starting the engine and changing the opera-
tion mode. The surrounding environment or
 The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the Refer to “Operation mode electromagnetic waves may make it impossi-
vehicle cannot be verified OFF reminder system” on ble to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key
page 5-16. and vehicle.
F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring Key lock-in prevention system

system N00559901168
N00559801196


When the operation mode is in OFF, the the driver’s door switch, the warning light The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
F.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compart- blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3 sec- ing when the low coolant temperature
ment, all the doors are closed, and someone onds as a warning, and the doors cannot be indicator goes out.
tries to lock the vehicle by pressing the locked. Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-
driver’s door switch, the warning light blinks cator” on page 5-75.
and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as
Starting and stopping the
a warning, and the doors cannot be locked.
engine WARNING
5 N00514601357  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
Door ajar prevention system ventilated area any longer than is needed
N00560001169 to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
Tips for starting bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
extremely poisonous, could build up and
 The operation mode can be in any mode cause serious injury or death.
to start the engine.
When the operation mode is in OFF, and  The starter motor will be turning for up to
someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing approximately 15 seconds if the engine CAUTION
the driver’s door switch while one of the switch is released at once. Pressing the
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
doors is not fully closed, the warning light engine switch again while the starter
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3 sec- motor is still turning will stop the starter at high speeds until the engine has had a
onds as a warning, and the doors cannot be motor. The starter motor will be turning chance to warm up.
locked. for up to approximately 30 seconds while
the engine switch is pressed.
If the engine does not start, wait for a Starting the engine
Operation mode OFF reminder while and then attempt to start the engine
system again. Trying repeatedly with the starter
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
N00560101160
motor still turning will damage the starter
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is
mechanism.
a system that automatically controls fuel
 If the engine will not start because the bat-
injection. There is usually no need to depress
tery is weak or discharged, refer to
the accelerator pedal when starting the
When the operation mode is in any mode “Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
engine.
other than OFF, all the doors are closed, and for instructions.
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing  A longer warm up period will only con-
between attempts to restart the engine.
sume extra fuel.

1. Make sure all occupants are properly 2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-
seated with seat belts fastened.
NOTE uously variable transmission (CVT)} or
 On vehicles equipped with continuously
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press
variable transmission (CVT), the engine can
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
only be started when the selector lever is in
firmly with your right foot. the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- there, then crank the engine. Release the
tion. accelerator pedal, immediately after the
NOTE For safety reasons, the engine should be engine starts.
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
 After the engine has not started
the brake pedal effort needed
for a while,
to start the
started when the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position in which the driving wheels could be flooded with too much gasoline.
5
engine may become greater. If this occurs, lock. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)
depress the brake pedal more firmly than or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle),
usual. push the accelerator pedal all the way
6. Press the engine switch.
7. Confirm that all warning lights and warn- down and hold it there, then press the
4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way engine switch to crank the engine. If the
ing displays are functioning properly.
down (manual transaxle). engine does not start after 5 to 6 seconds,
push the engine switch to stop cranking
NOTE NOTE the engine, and release the accelerator
 For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-  Minor noises may be heard on engine start- pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF.
axle, the engine will not start unless the up. These will disappear as the engine warms Wait a few seconds, and then press the
clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter- up. engine switch to crank the engine again
lock). This is a safety feature. while depressing the brake pedal (CVT)
When the engine is hard to start or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but
5. On vehicles equipped with manual trans- do not push the accelerator pedal. If the
After several attempts, you may experience
axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” engine fails to start, repeat these proce-
that the engine still does not start.
(Neutral) position. dures. If the engine still will not start, con-
On vehicles equipped with continuously 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such tact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer
variable transmission (CVT), make sure as lights, air conditioning blower and rear or a repair facility of your choice for
the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) window defogger, are turned off. assistance.
position.
Startability of continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) vehicles with an ambient
temperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower


When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20
°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
NOTE If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat-
from a standstill even with the selector lever  If you have to bring the engine to an emer- ing properly
gency stop while driving, press and hold the
in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) N00568301100
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press
position. Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the
it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will
This phenomenon occurs because the trans- floor console. Starting the engine and chang-
stop and the operation mode will go to ACC.
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does ing the operation mode should be now possi-
 On vehicles equipped with continuously
not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place ble.
5 the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
variable transmission (CVT), do not stop the
engine with the selector lever in any position Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot
and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes. other than the “P” (PARK) position. If the after starting the engine or changing the oper-
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be engine is stopped with the selector lever in ation mode.
able to start normally. any position other than the “P” (PARK) posi-
Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up tion, the operation mode will go to ACC
rather than OFF.
operation.
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
Stopping the engine tion.
N00568200014
WARNING 1. Stop the vehicle.

 Do not operate the engine switch while
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
driving except in an emergency. If the depressing the brake pedal.
engine is stopped while driving, the brake 3. On vehicles with a manual transaxle,
servomechanism will cease to function and press the engine switch to stop the engine,
braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, and then move the gearshift lever to the
the power steering system will not func- 1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a
NOTE
tion and it will require greater manual  Do not insert into the key slot anything other
downhill) position.
effort to operate the steering. This could than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam-
On vehicles equipped with continuously
result in a serious accident. age or a malfunction.
variable transmission (CVT), move the
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
and then press the engine switch to stop
the engine.


be used to lock and unlock the passenger’s
NOTE door.
 Remove the object or additional key from the
F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the To use the emergency key (A), unlock the
key slot. The vehicle may not be able to lock knob (B) and remove it from the
receive the registered ID code from the regis-
F.A.S.T.-key (C).
tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start
and the operation mode may not change.
5
F.A.S.T.-key reminder
1- Lock
2- Unlock
If the operation mode is in OFF and the

driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
in the key slot, a warning is issued with the theft starting system)
warning light and the buzzer buzzing for N00529600055
approximately 3 seconds to remind you to
remove the key. NOTE The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
 Only use the emergency key in an emer- nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
To operate without using the has run down, replace the battery as soon as bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
F.A.S.T.-key possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again. attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
N00514800017  After using the emergency key, be sure to achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key. a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi-
Emergency key lizer system.
N00515201174
Locking and unlocking the passenger’s All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
door cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-
electronics.
key. Turn the emergency key toward the front of
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such the vehicle to lock the door. After checking
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the that the door is locked, turn the emergency
vehicle has run down, the emergency key can key back to the center and remove it.

3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys NOTE slot.
N00561000042  You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro- you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys.
grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys for your
used to start the vehicle. vehicle from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a

5 F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. ming (Except for vehicles sold in
To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle Canada)
and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho- N00561201243
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
codes reprogrammed. 4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the
system if you have two valid (already regis-
tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not regis- UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys tered) F.A.S.T.-key. press the LOCK button during this time.
N00561100056 5. Release in sequence the LOCK and
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis- procedures below. pressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Per-
ter the ID code to the vehicle. form the following procedure within 30
1. Open the driver’s door. seconds.)
Registering the ID code can be done by your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it 6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
NOTE the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds
 Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.- and press the LOCK button during this
sold in Canada).
key programming is finished. Do not open or time.
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
close other doors.
low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming” procedure below.
If you choose to have your authorized 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per-
code, take your vehicle and all remaining form the following procedure within 30
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi seconds.)
Motors dealer.


7. Release in sequence the LOCK and
NOTE To lock
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if
pressing the LOCK button in step 6. The Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
the immobilizer warning light goes off dur-
immobilizer warning light will blink. doors.
ing the procedure.
The turn signal lights will also blink once.
Keyless entry system

NOTE
5
N00515501278
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the
Press the remote control transmitter buttons horn will sound once.
to lock or unlock the doors.
When registration of ID code is complete,
It can also help you signal for attention by
the buzzer will sound 3 times and the
setting off the panic alarm.
immobilizer indicator will come on for 30 To unlock
seconds.
If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program- Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
ming will be terminated and the buzzer driver’s door only.
will sound for 3 seconds. Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
button one more time to unlock all the doors.
NOTE The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
 F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi- The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
nated if the operation mode is put in OFF
before the immobilizer warning light starts NOTE
blinking.  The door unlock function can be set so that
all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button
8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.- 1- LOCK ( ) button (2) is pressed once.
Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on
key, repeat the process from step 1 after 2- UNLOCK ( ) button
page 5-22.
the operation mode is put in OFF. 3- Trunk button
4- PANIC button
NOTE 5- Operation indicator light To open the trunk lid
 The immobilizer display will go off immedi-
N00544401035
ately if the operation mode is put in OFF.
Press the trunk button (3) twice within about
5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened.

The trunk lid must be closed manually after it 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-
has been opened. onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
tion
during this time.
Answerback function The turn signal lights answerback function 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
N00544501094 can be changes. UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
If you want to change the answerback func- pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
The horn of the keyless entry system answer-
back function can be changed as required. tion, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
5 Motors dealer. Using the panic alarm
Horn deactivation/reactivation N00544701100
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
The answerback function can be set in the
ened, you can acti-vate the alarm to call atten-
following three ways. The buzzer answerback function can be
tion as follows:
turned ON or OFF as required.
One chime: The horn will not sound.
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
Two chimes: The horn will sound.
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the
Setting of door unlock function 1 second.
N00544601138 2. The headlights will blink on and off and
LOCK button is pressed twice
The door unlock function can be set to the the horn will sound intermittently for
within 1 second.
following two conditions. about 3 minutes.
Each time the door unlock function is set, a 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. chime will sound to tell you the condition of the remote control transmitter.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- the door unlock function.
bination headlights and dimmer switch to NOTE
the “OFF” position. Number of  The indicator light (4) comes on each time a
Condition
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- chimes button is pressed.
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) One chime All doors unlock  The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
during this time. feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only may change if your vehicle is near a TV
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of transmitting tower, a power station, or a
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. 1. Put the operation mode in OFF. radio station.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
the “OFF” position.

plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry
NOTE Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
 If the following conditions are observed after
Operation is subject to the following two con-
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
ditions.
ton on the remote control transmitter, the
buttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be
replaced.
ference.
• The doors cannot be locked or unlocked.
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
received, including interference that may 5
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not
come on.
cause undesired operation of this device.
 If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a WARNING NOTE
replacement.  Changes or modifications not expressly
 If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-  Be sure to perform the procedure with the
approved by the party responsible for
key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
compliance could void the user’s authority
Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.- Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
key can be programmed for your vehicle. open the case, the transmitter may come out.
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with the elec-
tronic immobilizer and keyless entry system. Procedure for replacing the 3. Remove the old battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft remote control transmitter bat-
starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key pro- up.
gramming” on page 5-20.
tery
N00562100066 + side
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
General information electricity from your body by touching a
N00562000065 metal grounded object. - side
Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre- 2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
quency subject to Federal Communications insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade
Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold screwdriver into the notch in the case and Coin type
use it to open the case. battery
in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For
CR2032
vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-

Door locks
5. Close the case firmly.
6. Check the keyless entry system to see that
WARNING
 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
it works.
Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
NOTE trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
 You may purchase a replacement battery at overcome by heat and suffer serious
an electric appliance store. injury or death due to heat stroke.
5  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can  Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In
addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-
replace the battery for you if you prefer.
dren can activate switches and controls,
resulting in an injury or fatal accident.
 When closing a door, make sure that the 1- Lock
CAUTION door is fully closed and the door-ajar 2- Unlock
 When the remote control transmitter case is warning display goes out on the informa-
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. tion screen on the multi-information dis-
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo- play. If the door is ajar it could open while NOTE
nents. driving and cause an accident.  When locking or unlocking with the key,
only the driver’s door will be locked or
unlocked.
Door locks To lock and unlock with the key To lock or unlock all doors, use the power
N00509201573
(driver’s door) door lock switches, the keyless entry system
or the F.A.S.T-key operation. (if so
WARNING Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to equipped)
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-25,
 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and lock the door. After checking that the door is
“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-6 and
locked while driving. locked, turn the key back to the center and 5-21, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
• Locked doors, in combination with the remove it. key” on page 5-11.
use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
of ejection in an accident.
the passenger’s door can be locked and
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
unlocked using the emergency key.
especially small children, from opening
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-19.
doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
from gaining access to your vehicle when
you slow or come to a stop.

Power door locks

2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi- the lock knob will automatically return to the
To lock or unlock the door from cle. Close the door. unlocked position.
the inside
Operation mode ON reminder
Move the lock knob to the lock position to
lock the door. system (vehicles equipped with
All doors should be kept locked while driv- the F.A.S.T.-key)
ing. N00503800150
5
If the driver’s door is opened while the engine
is stopped and the operation mode is in any
position other than OFF, the operation mode
ON buzzer will sound intermittently to
remind you to put the operation mode in OFF.
Key reminder system (except Power door locks

for vehicles equipped with the N00509301646
F.A.S.T.-key) NOTE
N00549600253
 When locking or unlocking with the key on
1- Lock If the ignition switch is turned off and the the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will
2- Unlock driver’s door is opened with the key in the lock or unlock.
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will  Repeated continuous operation between lock
The driver’s door can be unlocked without sound intermittently to remind you to remove and unlock could activate the power door
using the lock knob by pulling on the inside the key. locking system’s built-in protection circuit,
and prevent the system from operating. If
door handle. this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-
Lock out protection ating the power door lock switch.
To lock the door without using N00517300042
the key If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-

ation mode is in any mode other than OFF
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked when you push the lock knob forward with
position. the driver’s door or passenger’s door open,

Child safety locks for rear door
To lock and unlock the doors To unlock the doors Child safety locks for rear
N00563401207
door
You can select the functions to unlock the N00509401315
Using the power door lock switch doors either using the ignition switch or the
(if so equipped) engine switch, or using the selector lever
position {continuously variable transmis-
sion (CVT)}.
5 These functions are not activated when the
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
vate or deactivate these functions, please
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
Using the selector lever position 1- To lock

{continuously variable transmis- 2- To release
1- Lock sion (CVT)}

2- Unlock Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-
All doors will unlock when the selector lever gers, especially children, from opening the
is moved to the “P” (PARK) position with the rear door using the inside door handle.
All of the doors can be locked or unlocked by ignition switch or the operation mode in ON. A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-
pressing the power door lock switch on the vided on each rear door.
driver’s or the front passenger door. When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
rear door cannot be opened using the inside
door handle.
To open the rear door when the child safety
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-
side door handle.
When the lever is in the release position (2),
the child safety lock is released and the rear

Trunk lid
door can be opened using the inside door han-
dle.
CAUTION Using the remote control transmitter
 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when (Vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key)
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from
WARNING the exhaust could lead to burns. Press the trunk button (Vehicles with
 Always keep the doors tightly closed and F.A.S.T.-key). (See “Free-hand Advanced
locked when driving. An unlocked door Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)” on page
may be accidentally opened by a passen- 5-9.)
To open
ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there The trunk lid will pop up to slightly. Lift it to 5
is a greater risk of someone being thrown open the trunk.
from the vehicle in an accident. Operation from outside the vehicle
Operation from inside the vehicle
Using the key (Vehicles with key cylin-
Trunk lid der)
N00509501215
Insert the key and turn it clockwise.
WARNING
 It is dangerous to drive with the trunk lid The trunk lid will pop up slightly. Lift it to
open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can open the trunk.
enter the cabin. CO is an invisible, odor-
less gas that can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
 Do not allow children to have access to the
trunk by climbing into the trunk from
outside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Pull the trunk lid release lever, located to the
If trapped in the trunk, it is possible to left of the driver’s seat, up to open the trunk.
escape from the trunk by using the inside
emergency trunk release lever. (See
“Inside emergency trunk lid release” on
CAUTION
page 5-28.)  Do not use the trunk lid release lever while
the vehicle is moving. If the trunk lid is
opened, objects in the trunk could fall onto
the road and cause an accident.

Inside emergency trunk lid release
NOTE Inside emergency trunk lid WARNING

 The trunk area light comes on when the trunk
lid is opened, and goes out when it is closed.
release  Children should never be left unsuper-
vised in or around vehicles.
N00509801188
 Unsupervised children could lock them-
The emergency trunk lid release is designed selves in an open vehicle or trunk.
To close to provide a way to open the trunk lid from  People trapped inside a vehicle or trunk,
inside the trunk. It was developed to help pre- even if only for a short period of time, can
5 Pull the trunk lid downward as illustrated. vent death and serious injuries to children quickly die from suffocation or heat
stroke, especially on hot days. Interior
Gently slam the trunk lid from the outside so who might become locked inside a vehicle
trunk. temperatures in vehicles can rise in min-
that it is completely closed. Always ensure
utes.
the trunk lid is securely closed.
The emergency trunk lid release lever (see  Keep your vehicle doors locked and the
illustration) is mounted on the trunk lid. trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep
your vehicle keys away from children.
The lever glows in the dark after exposure to
sunlight. To open the trunk from the inside, move the
lever (A) in the direction of the arrow on the
lever. Push up on the trunk lid to open the
trunk and climb out.
CAUTION
 Be careful to prevent catching anyone’s fin-
gers when closing the trunk lid.
 Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-
firm that the trunk lid is closed. If the trunk You and your family should familiarize your-
lid opens while driving the vehicle, objects selves with the location and operation of the
stored in the trunk could fall out onto the emergency trunk lid release lever. Children
road. should be taught not to play in or around
vehicles.
Manual window control (if so equipped)
CAUTION Power window control WARNING

 When loading the trunk, place your things so N00510800370  Never leave the vehicle without carrying
that they will not touch the emergency trunk the key.
lid release lever when you close the trunk.  Never leave children or unreliable adults
Otherwise you could damage the lever and unattended inside the vehicle.
make it unusable.
Main switch
5
Manual window control (if so
N00548700130
The main switch located on the driver’s door

equipped) can be used to operate all the windows.
N00510700021 A window can be opened or closed by operat-
ing the corresponding switch.
1- Open (down) Press the switch down to open the window,
2- Close (up) and pull up the switch to close it.
If the driver’s door window switch is fully
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door
NOTE window automatically opens/closes com-
 Never try to operate the main switch and pletely. (Type 1)
sub-switch in different directions at the same If the driver’s door window switch is fully
time. This will freeze the window in posi- pressed down, the driver’s door window auto-
tion. matically opens completely. (Type 2)
 Operating the power windows repeatedly If you want to stop the window movement,
1- To open with the engine stopped will run down the operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
2- To close battery. Use the window switches only while tion.
the engine is running.
WARNING
 Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

Power window control

stopped. However, once the driver’s door or
Type 1 Sub switch the front passenger’s door is opened, the
N00548800098
power windows cannot be operated.
Lock switch
N00549000169
When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-

5 senger door switches cannot be used to open
or close the door windows, and the main
switch will open or close only the driver’s
door window. To unlock the switch, press it
Type 2
again.
1- Close
2- Open
Type 1
Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own pas-

senger door window, unless the driver’s win-
dow lock switch is activated.
Type 2
NOTE
1- Driver’s door window switch  The rear door windows open only half-way.
2- Front passenger door window switch
3- Left rear door window switch 1- Lock
4- Right rear door window switch Power window timer function 2- Unlock
5- Lock switch N00548900132
The power windows can be run up or down

when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON.
The door windows can be opened or closed
for a 30-second period after the engine is

Power window control
WARNING CAUTION NOTE

 Before driving with a child in the vehicle,  The safety mechanism is deactivated while  If the battery terminals are disconnected or
be sure to lock the window switch to make the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe- the fuse for electric window is replaced, the
it inoperative. Children tampering with cially careful that fingers are not trapped in safety mechanism will be cancelled and the
the switch could easily trap their hands or the door window opening. door window will not automatically
heads in the window.  Do not deliberately trap your hands or head open/close completely.
in order to activate the safety mechanism. If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
sonal injury could result.
driver’s door window switch until the win-
dow has been fully closed. Following this,
5
Safety mechanism (Driver’s release the switch, raise the switch once
door window of Type 1 only) again and hold it in this condition for at least
N00528801161
NOTE 1 second, then release it. You should now be
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the able to operate the driver’s door window in
 The safety mechanism can be activated if the
the normal fashion.
door window is automatically lowered a little. driving conditions or other circumstances
After the door window is lowered, clear the cause the door window to be subjected to a
obstruction, then pull up the switch again to physical shock similar to that caused by What to do if you hear wind
close the door window. trapped hand or head.
 If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or
buffeting when driving
N00551400043
more times in a row, the safety mechanism
WARNING will be cancelled and the door window will Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
 If the battery terminals are disconnected not close correctly. ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
or the fuse for electric window is replaced, In such a case, the following procedure or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
the safety mechanism will be cancelled. should be implemented to rectify this situa- wind buffeting when driving with one or both
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious tion.
rear door windows down or partially opened.
injury could result. If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
driver’s door window switch until that win-
dow has been fully closed. Following this, mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
door windows open, open the front door win-
CAUTION release the switch, raise the switch once
dows as well as the rear door windows to
again and hold it in this condition for at
 The safety mechanism is deactivated just
least1 second, then release it. You should minimize the condition.
before the door window closes. This allows
now be able to operate in the normal fashion.
the door window to close completely. There-
fore be especially careful that fingers are not
trapped in the door window opening.

Parking brake
Parking brake To apply To deactivate

N00511400399
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a
uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi-
tion for vehicles equipped with a manual
5 transaxle, set the selector lever to “P”
(PARK) position for vehicles equipped with a
continuously variable transmission (CVT).
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the 1- Pull the lever up slightly.
button at the end of hand grip. 2- Press and hold the button at the end of
When the parking brake is set and the the hand grip.
ignition switch or the operation mode is 3- Push the lever downward.
in the “ON” position, the brake warn-
ing light in the instrument cluster will
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
come on.
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
Before driving, be sure to release the downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
parking brake.

Steering wheel height adjustment
CAUTION Inside rearview mirror

 Before driving, be sure that the parking N00511601402
brake is fully released and brake warning Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after
light is off. making any seat adjustments so as to have a
If you drive without the parking brake fully clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
released, the warning lamp will illuminate
and a buzzer sounds when the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
Type 1
5
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure. A- Wheel lock
B- Release
Steering wheel height WARNING

Type 2
adjustment  After adjusting, make sure the lever is

N00511500231 secured in the locked (A) position.
To adjust the steering wheel to the desired  Do not attempt to adjust the steering
position, move the lever upward or down- wheel while driving. This can be danger-
ward while moving the steering wheel to the ous.
desired level.  When releasing the lever (moving it to the
position (B)), be sure to hold the steering
wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering WARNING
wheel may slip down too suddenly.  Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
view mirror while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-
ing.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the

view through the rear window.

Inside rearview mirror
To adjust the vertical mirror To adjust the mirror position To reduce the glare
position
It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
left/right to adjust its position. Type 1
It is possible to move the mirror up and down
to adjust its position. The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the
mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
5 cles behind you during night driving.
1- Daytime position
2- Night position

Outside rearview mirrors
Type 2 NOTE To adjust the mirror position

 If you want to stop automatic mode, press N00549100144
When the headlights of the vehicles behind the switch (3) and the indicator (1) will go
you are very bright, the reflection factor of The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
off.
the rearview mirror is automatically changed when the ignition switch or the operation
To return to automatic mode, press the
to reduce the glare. mode is in ON or ACC.
switch again. Or turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position or put the operation mode Move the lever (A) to the same side as the
mirror you wish to adjust.
in ON, after turning the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position or putting the operation
5
mode in OFF.
Outside rearview mirrors

N00512200206
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after

making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the WARNING

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear- L- Left outside mirror adjustment
or the operation mode is put in ON, the green view mirrors while driving. This can be R- Right outside mirror adjustment
indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection dangerous.
factor of the mirror is automatically changed. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ing. Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-
tion.
NOTE  Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
The objects you see in the mirror will look
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner 1- Up
smaller and farther away than they
on the sensors (2), as reduced sensitivity
appear in a regular flat mirror. 2- Down
could result.
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis- 3- Right
tance of vehicles following you when 4- Left
changing lanes.

Ignition switch
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or [Except for vehicles equipped with the
NOTE condensation. Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
 After adjusting, return the lever to the “•”
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]
(OFF) position (C).
the defogger is on.
The heater will be turned off automatically in
about 20 minutes.
To fold the mirror
N00549200099
5 The outside mirror can be manually folded in
towards the side window to prevent damage
when parking in tight locations.
OFF
The engine is off. The key can be inserted and

Ignition switch removed only when the switch is in this posi-
N00512401739 tion.
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- ACC
key)]
Door mirror heater (if so equipped) For information on operations for vehicles
N00549301286 Allows operation of some electrical accesso-
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
ries with the engine off.
When the rear window defogger switch is rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
pressed with the engine running, the outside “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. (F.A.S.T.-key):
Current will flow through the heater element Engine switch” on page 5-13.

Starting the engine

For information on operation for vehicles
ON equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
The engine runs and all accessories can be “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
used. (F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping the
engine” on page 5-16.
START [Except for vehicles equipped with the
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- 5
Engages the starter. Release the key when the ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]
engine starts.It will automatically return to
the “ON” position.
CAUTION Tips for starting
NOTE  If the engine is stopped while driving, the  Do not operate the starter motor continu-
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic power brake booster will cease to function ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
could run the battery down or damage the
(which the transponder inside the key sends) the power steering system will not function
starter motor. If the engine does not start,
must match the one registered to the immobi- and it will require greater manual effort to
operate the steering. turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo-
 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for position, wait a few seconds, and then try
bilizer” on page 5-3.)
a long time when the engine is not running. again. Trying repeatedly with the engine
Doing so will cause the battery to be dis- or starter motor still turning will damage
charged. the starter mechanism.
To remove the key  Do not turn the key to the “START” position  If the engine will not start because the bat-
N00550901240
when the engine is running, doing so could tery is weak or discharged, refer to
1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) damage the starter motor. “Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)
position {continuously variable transmis- for instructions.
sion (CVT)}.  A longer warm up period will only con-
2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and
remove it.
Starting the engine sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
N00512601861 enough for driving when the low coolant
temperature indicator goes out.
Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
cator” on page 5-75.
key)]

Starting the engine

2. Insert the ignition key. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
WARNING 3. Make sure the parking brake is applied. tion and make certain that all warning
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
4. Press and hold the brake pedal down lights are functioning properly before
ventilated area any longer than is needed
firmly with your right foot. starting the engine.
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and 5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
extremely poisonous, could build up and down (manual transaxle). position without pressing the accelerator
cause serious injury or death. pedal. Release the key when the engine
NOTE starts.
5  On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle,
CAUTION the starter will not operate unless the clutch NOTE
 Do not push-start the vehicle. pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock).  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive up. These will disappear as the engine warms
at high speeds until the engine has had a 6. On vehicles equipped with manual trans- up.
chance to warm up. axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N”
 Release the ignition switch as soon as the (Neutral) position.
engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor
On vehicles equipped with continuously When the engine is hard to start
will be damaged.
variable transmission (CVT), make sure
the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) After several attempts, you may experience
position. that the engine still does not start.
Starting the engine
NOTE 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
This model is equipped with an electronically  On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys- will not operate unless the selector lever is in window defogger, are turned off.
tem that automatically controls fuel injection. the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- 2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-
There is usually no need to depress the accel- tion. uously variable transmission (CVT)} or
erator pedal when starting the engine. For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press
The starter should not be run for more than 15 (PARK) position so that the wheels are the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
locked. there, then crank the engine. Release the
seconds at a time.
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds accelerator pedal, immediately after the
between attempts to restart the engine. engine starts.
1. Make sure all occupants are properly

seated with seat belts fastened.
Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

3. If the engine still will not start, the engine not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
could be flooded with too much gasoline. the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
NOTE
 During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-
While depressing the brake pedal (CVT) and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed
or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
up. This is normal and not harmful to the
push the accelerator pedal all the way able to start normally. transaxle.
down and hold it there, then crank the Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the igni- operation.
tion switch to the “OFF” position and
release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few
To start 5
seconds, and then crank the engine again
Manual transaxle (if so
for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the equipped) Press the clutch pedal all the way down and
brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal N00512701181
shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Then
(manual transaxle), but do not push the gradually release the clutch pedal while
accelerator pedal. Release the ignition The shift pattern below is shown on the gear- depressing the accelerator pedal.
switch if the engine starts. If the engine shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way
down while shifting gears.
fails to start, repeat these procedures. If CAUTION
the engine still will not start, contact your  Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair while the vehicle is moving forward; doing
facility of your choice for assistance. so will damage the transaxle.
 Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
because this will cause premature clutch
Startability of CVT vehicle with wear or damage.
ambient temperature of -4 °F (-20  Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position
°C) or lower (illegal in many states).
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest,
When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20 because this can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
from a standstill even with the selector lever
in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
position.
NOTE
This phenomenon occurs because the trans-  If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the
clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
be easier.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

conditions (relatively steady speeds) will Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The
NOTE improve your fuel economy. engine may suffer damage.
 To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake
gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position,
Upshift speeds life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend-
and then shift it into reverse. Shift point
Acceleration Cruise ing a steep hill.
 To avoid grinding noises when shifting into
reverse, wait approximately 3 seconds with Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug-
1st gear to 15 mph 15 mph ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as
the clutch pedal depressed when the vehicle
2nd gear (24 km/h) (24 km/h) when turning a corner or when driving up a
5 is stationary.
2nd gear to 28 mph 19 mph steep hill.
3rd gear (45 km/h) (31 km/h)
Proper shift points
N00537400065
3rd gear to 36 mph 33 mph Recommended downshifting speed
4th gear (58 km/h) (53 km/h)
Always use care to change the gear with the
vehicle speed matched to the engine speed. 4th gear to 45 mph 45 mph Downshifting speed Shift point
Proper shifting will improve fuel economy 5th gear (72 km/h) (72 km/h)
Under 20 mph Shift down from cur-
and prolong engine life. (32 km/h) rent gear to 2nd gear.
At high altitude locations, upshift as listed
20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur-
CAUTION below.
48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear.
 Avoid downshifting that may cause the
tachometer pointer to enter the red zone. Shift point Upshift speeds
This puts the engine at risk of being dam- 1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h) Driving precautions
aged.
2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h) N00513100244
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a han-

3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h) drest. This can result in premature wear of
Upshifting 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h) the transaxle shift forks.
N00512900131
For the best fuel economy and performance in Maximum possible driving speed
using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed Downshifting
below. N00513000096
It is recommended that you downshift to a Shift Maximum possible driving

At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle lower gear when needed to maintain the points speed
speeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruise desired speed, according to the table. 1st gear 28 mph (45 km/h)

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

Shift Maximum possible driving The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
DRIVING DOWNHILL cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
points speed
(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
2nd gear 53 mph (85 km/h) According to the conditions, the transmission the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
3rd gear 78 mph (125 km/h) will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio pedal.
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may
4th gear 105 mph (170 km/h)
help reduce your need to use the service
brake.
 The table above shows the maximum rec- 5
ommended driving speed for in each gear.
Do not drive near or at these speeds for Selector lever operation
prolonged periods of time. N00560301087
As an additional safety precaution, models

Continuously variable equipped with a continuously variable trans-
mission have a shift-lock device that holds
transmission (CVT) (if so the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.
equipped) To move the selector lever from the “P”
N00560200050 (PARK) position to another position, follow
the steps below.
The CVT will automatically and continuously
change its gear ratio depending on road and 1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
driving conditions. This helps achieve 2. Move the selector lever to the desired
smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency. position.
DRIVING UPHILL NOTE

 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
(PARK) to another position if the ignition
The transmission prevents unnecessary switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi-
upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is tion, or if the key has been removed, or oper-
released and ensures smooth driving. ation mode is in “OFF” or “ACC”, or if the
Set the selector lever in the gate to
brake pedal is not pressed and held down.
operate while the brake pedal is
depressed.


Set the selector lever in the gate to When the selector lever cannot be
operate. shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion
WARNING N00563300049
 Always press the brake pedal when shift- When the selector lever cannot be shifted
ing the selector lever into a selector posi- from the “P” (PARK) position to another
tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. position while the brake pedal is pressed and
5 When beginning to drive, do not shift the
held down with the ignition switch or the
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position while pressing the accelerator
operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat
pedal. This will cause the vehicle to or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-
“jump” forward or backward. tioning. 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
Immediately have your vehicle checked by an foot.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a 5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
NOTE repair facility of your choice. release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
 To prevent mistakes in operating the lever, If you need to move the vehicle, shift the the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
make sure you stop briefly at each position. selector lever as follows. pressing the screwdriver down.
After operating, check the position in the
multi-information display. 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, applied.
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the 2. Stop the engine if it is running.
selector lever from being moved from the 3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
“P” (PARK) position. tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
gently as shown to remove the cover.
 For a shift indicated by in the illustra-
tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake
pedal, the selector lever may not move.

Selector lever position display “R” REVERSE WARNING

N00560400078  To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
When the ignition switch is turned to the Move the lever to this position only after the stopped on a slope, the engine should be
vehicle has come to a complete stop. started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.
ON, the selector lever position is shown on
 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
the multi-information display. CAUTION on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
5
motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” tion.
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission
may be damaged. “D” DRIVE
This position is used for most city and high-

“N” NEUTRAL way driving. The transmission will automati-
cally and continuously change its gear ratio
At this position, the transmission is disen- depending on road and driving conditions.
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
a manual transaxle and should be used when CAUTION
Selector lever positions the vehicle is not moving for an extended  To prevent transmission damage, never shift
N00560601093
length of time during driving, such as in a into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
traffic jam. (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
motion.
“P” PARK
WARNING
 Never move the selector lever to the “N”
This position locks the transmission to pre- “Ds” DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can DRIVING
you could accidentally slip it into the “P”
be started from the “P” (PARK) position. (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position,
damaging the transmission. Use when engine braking is needed, or for
high-power sport drive.

“L” LOW When a malfunction occurs in CAUTION

the automatic transaxle  If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while
This position is for driving up very steep hills N00549500018
driving, the indicator will blink.
and for engine braking at low speeds when In this case, immediately park your vehicle
driving down steep hills. in a safe place and follow these procedures:
When the selector lever position [If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec-
indicator blinks ond), the CVT fluid is overheating.]
WARNING
5  This position can be used for maximum
N00574601049
When the selector lever position indicator

Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
turn off the engine. Move the selector lever
engine braking. blinks while you are driving, there could be a to the “P” (PARK) position and open the
Be very careful not to shift into “L” malfunction in the automatic transaxle system engine hood. Keep the engine, idling.
(LOW) suddenly. After a while, move the selector lever into
or CVT fluid temperature becomes abnor-
Sudden engine braking may cause the any position other than “P” (PARK) position
mally high. and confirm that the indicator stops blinking.
tires to skid.
Select this position according to the road It is safe to continue driving if the indicator
conditions and vehicle speed. no longer blinks.
If the indicator continues blinking, contact
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
repair facility of your choice immediately.
[If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2
seconds), the CVT may be operating in fail-
safe mode due to a malfunction.]
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility of
your choice immediately.
NOTE
 The “A” indicator blinks only if the CVT
selector lever switch is broken.
It is not seen during normal driving.

Operation of the CVT CAUTION Waiting

N00560801095  Use the selector lever in the correct shift
position in accordance with driving condi- For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
CAUTION tions. lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever
 Before selecting a position with the engine Never coast downhill backward in the driv- position and held stationary with the service
running and the vehicle stationary, firmly ing shift position “D” (DRIVE), “Ds”
brake.
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi- (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING), “L”
For longer waiting periods with the engine
cle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
(LOW) or coast forward in the “R”
(REVERSE) position. running, place the selector lever in the “N” 5
CVT is engaged, especially when the engine Engine stopping and increased brake pedal (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
speed or idle speed is high, or with the air and steering effort could lead to an accident. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
conditioning operating.  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal with the service brake.
Do not release the brake pedal until you are pressed when the vehicle is stationary. Prior to moving off after having stopped the
ready to drive away. This can damage the CVT. vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in
 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal “D” (DRIVE) position.
all times. while holding down the brake pedal with the
Using the left foot could cause driver move- selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
ment delay in case of an emergency. the engine revolutions may not rise as high CAUTION
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run as when performing the same operation with  To avoid transmission overheating, never try
the engine at high rpms when shifting from the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). position. using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake.
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the
 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will Passing acceleration the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
mature wear of brake pads. ation may occur if the selector lever is in a
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
position (when passing another vehicle) push (NEUTRAL).
the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will
automatically downshift.
Parking
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,

Service brake
and then move the selector lever to the “P” If the power brake unit or either of the two
(PARK) position.
WARNING brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-
 Do not leave any objects near the brake
erly, the rest of the brake system will still
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;
When the CVT makes no speed work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
doing so could prevent the full pedal
quickly.
change stroke that would be necessary in an
You will know this has happened if you find
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can
be operated freely at all times. Make sure you need to press the brake down farther, or
If the CVT does not shift while driving, or harder when slowing down or stopping, or if
5 your vehicle does not pick up enough speed
the floor mat is securely held in place.
the brake warning light and the warning dis-
when starting on an uphill slope, it may be play in the multi-information display come
that there is something unusual happening in CAUTION on. Have the brake system repaired at an
the transmission. Have your vehicle checked  It is important not to drive the vehicle with authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or your foot resting on the brake pedal when repair facility of your choice immediately.
a repair facility of your choice immediately. braking is not required. This practice can
result in very high brake temperatures, pre-
mature lining wear, and possible damage to
WARNING
Service brake the brakes.  Never coast downhill with the engine OFF.
N00517501328 Keep the engine running whenever your
vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the
engine while driving, the power brake
Brake pedal Power brakes booster will stop working and your brakes
N00517600436 will not work as well.
Overuse of the brake can cause weakening, Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes  If the power assist is lost or if either brake
resulting in poor brake response and prema- for more braking force with less brake pedal hydraulic system stops working properly,
ture wear of the brake pads. effort. take your vehicle to an authorized
When driving down a long or steep hill, use Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
Your brakes are designed to operate at full
engine braking by moving the selector lever ity of your choice immediately.
capacity, even if the power assist is not being
to “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIV- used.
ING) or “L” (LOW) position. If the power assist is not being used, the effort
needed to press the brake pedal is greater.
If you should lose the power assist for some
reason, the brakes will still work.

Hill start assist

2. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
Brake pad wear alarm CAUTION the gearshift lever into the 1st position.
N00550700124  Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
On vehicles with CVT, place the selector
The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
lever into the “D” (DRIVE) position.
Under certain circumstances, even when hill
metallic squeal when the brake pads have
start assist is activated, the vehicle may
worn down enough to need service.
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf- NOTE
If you hear this sound, have the brake pads ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily  When reversing on an uphill slope, place the
replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors gearshift lever or selector lever into the “R”
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
pery. position. 5
 The hill start assist is not designed to keep
WARNING the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start
for more than 2 seconds.
 Driving with worn brake pads will make it assist will maintain the braking force
harder to stop, and can cause an accident.  When facing uphill, do not rely on using the
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position applied while stopped for approximately 2
as an alternative to depressing the brake seconds.
pedal. 4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill
Hill start assist Doing so could cause an accident. start assist will gradually decrease the
N00562601127  Do not perform the following operation braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
The hill start assist makes it easy to start off while the hill start assist is operating.
on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
[Except for vehicles equipped with the NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key]  The hill start assist is activated when all of
vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
brakes applied for approximately 2 seconds the following conditions are met.
“ACC” position.
when you move your foot from the brake • The engine is running.
(The hill start assist will not be activated
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. The
while the engine is starting or immediately
hill start assist could stop operating, which
after the engine is started.)
could result in an accident.
To operate
N00562701131
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the

brake pedal.

Brake assist system

If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
NOTE Warning indicator brakes will be applied with more force than
• On vehicles with manual transaxle, the N00562800092
usual.
gearshift lever is in the following position. If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
[When starting an uphill slope forwards.]
tem, the following indicator will turn on.
The gearshift lever is in any position other CAUTION
than “R” (Reverse).  The brake assist system is not a device
(The hill start assist will operate, even if the - ASC indicator designed to exercise braking force greater
5 gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
tion.)
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
sufficient distance between your vehicle and
[When starting an uphill slope backwards.] a vehicle in front of you without relying too
The gearshift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) CAUTION much on the brake assist system.
position.  If the warning is displayed, the hill start
(The hill start assist will not operate when assist will not operate. Start off carefully.
the gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral)  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
position.) engine.
NOTE
Restart the engine and check whether the  Once the brake assist system is operational,
• On vehicles with CVT, the selector lever is
indicator goes out, in which case the hill start it maintains great braking force even if the
in any position other than “P” (PARK) or
assist is again working normally. brake pedal is lightly released.
“N” (NEUTRAL).
If they remain displayed or reappear fre- To stop its operation, completely remove
• The vehicle is completely stationary, with
quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle your foot from the brake pedal.
the brake pedal depressed.
immediately, but the vehicle should be  When the brake assist system is in use while
• The parking brake is released.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi driving, you may feel as if the depressed
 The hill start assist will not operate if the brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
accelerator pedal is depressed before the motions in conjunction with the operation
choice as soon as possible.
brake pedal is released. noise, or the vehicle body and the steering
 The hill start assist also operates when wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
reversing on an uphill slope. assist system is operating normally and does
 When the hill start assist is activated, you Brake assist system not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
may feel the operating sound or vibration N00567301116 depress the brake pedal.
from under the body.  When the anti-lock brake system warning
The brake assist system is a device assisting
This is a normal result of the hill start assist light is illuminated, the brake assist system is
operation, and does not indicate a problem.
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal
not functioning.
firmly such as in emergency stop situations
and provides greater braking force.

Anti-lock braking system

 When the anti-lock braking system is in
Anti-lock braking system use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-
Anti-lock braking system warn-
N00517900338
ing and hear a unique sound. It may also ing light
The anti-lock braking system helps prevent feel as if the pedal resists being pressed. N00531600674
the wheels from locking up when braking. In this situation, simply hold the brake
This helps maintain vehicle drivability and pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
steering wheel handling. brake, which will result in reduced
braking performance.
5
Driving hints
CAUTION
 When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden  The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
braking), steering is slightly different accidents. It is your responsibility to take
from normal driving conditions. Use the safety precautions and to drive carefully.
steering wheel carefully.  To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
 Always keep a safe distance from the system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- same size and the same type.
If there is a malfunction in the system, the
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
anti-lock braking system warning light will
system, leave a greater braking distance
NOTE come on.
when:
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered  You may feel the operating sound or vibra-
tion from under the body when driving light comes on when the ignition switch is
roads.
immediately after starting the engine. This is turned to the “ON” position or the operation
• Driving on uneven road surfaces.
a normal result the anti-lock braking system mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds
 Operation of anti-lock braking system is
makes when performing a self-check. It does later.
not restricted situations where brakes are
not indicate a problem.
applied suddenly. This system may also
 The anti-lock braking system can be used CAUTION
prevent the wheels from locking when
after the vehicle has reached a speed over
you drive over manholes, steel roadwork approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
 Any of the following indicates that the anti-
plates, road markings, or any uneven road lock braking system is not functioning and
working when the vehicle slows below 3
surface. only the standard brake system is working.
mph (5 km/h).
(The standard brake system is functioning
normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice.

Electric power steering system (EPS)
CAUTION If the anti-lock braking system Front Rear

• When the ignition switch is turned to the warning light and brake warning
“ON” position or the operation mode is put light illuminate at the same time
in ON, the warning light does not come on
or it remains on and does not go off.
• The warning light comes on while driving
5 If the warning light illuminate

while driving The anti-lock braking system and brake force
N00531700604 distribution function may not work, so hard
braking could make the vehicle unstable.
If only the anti-lock braking sys- Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an Electric power steering sys-
tem warning light illuminate authorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or tem (EPS)
 Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv- repair facility of your choice. N00568400074
ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. The power steering system operates while the
Test the system by restarting the engine After driving on icy roads engine is running. It helps reduce the effort
and driving at a speed of about 12 mph N00529200080 needed to turn the steering wheel.
(20 km/h) or higher. The power steering system has mechanical
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove
If the warning light then remains off dur- steering capability in case the power assist is
any snow and ice which may have be left
ing driving, there is no abnormal condi- lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an
tion. son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to
However, if the warning light does not cle, but you will notice it takes much more
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the
disappear, or if they come on again when effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
cables located at each wheel.
the vehicle is driven, have the vehicle cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
checked by an authorized MITSUBISHI Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
MOTORS dealer or repair facility of your choice.

Active stability control (ASC)
WARNING Electric power steering system Active stability control

 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is warning light (ASC)
moving. Stopping the engine would make
N00559100176
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident. The Active stability control (ASC) takes
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-
tem, traction control function and skid control
NOTE function to help maintain the vehicle’s control 5
 During repeated full-lock turning of the and traction. Please read this section in con-
steering wheel (for example, while you are junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking ing system, traction control function and skid
space), a protection function may be acti- control function.
vated to prevent overheating of the power
steering system. This function will make the Anti-lock braking system  P.5-49
steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In Traction control function  P.5-52
this event, limit your turning of the steering Skid control function  P.5-52
wheel for a while. When the system has If there is a malfunction in the system, the
cooled down, the steering effort will return warning light will come on.
to normal. Under normal conditions, the warning lamp CAUTION
 If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi- comes on when the ignition switch is turned  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the to the “ON” position or the operation mode is cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
headlights may become dim. This behavior put in ON, and goes off after the engine has from acting on the vehicle. This system, like
is not abnormal. The headlights will return to any other system, has limits and cannot help
started.
their original brightness after a short while. you to maintain traction and control of the
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-
CAUTION ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s
 If the warning light appears while the engine responsibillty to drive carefully, This means
is running, have the vehicle inspected by an taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a ronmental conditions.
repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-  Be sure to use the same specified type and
sible. It may become harder to turn the steer- size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
ing wheel. ASC may not work properly.


ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to deactivate the system by pressing down the
CAUTION start moving from a stopped condition. It also “ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer.
 Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
provides sufficient driving force and steering When the ASC is deactivated, the indica-
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
performance as the vehicle turns while press- tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC,
may stop functioning properly.
ing the acceleration pedal. momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch;
the indicator is turned off.
NOTE CAUTION
5  An operating sound or vibration may be  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
emitted from under the body in the following road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
situations. The sound or vibration is associ- the vehicle at moderate speeds.
ated with checking the operations of the
ASC. At this time, you may feel a shock
from under the body and the brake pedal if
you depress it. These do not indicate a mal-
Skid control function
N00559300051
function.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the The skid control function is designed to help
“ON” position or the operation mode is put the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
in ON. slippery roads or during rapid steering
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine
the engine is turned on. output and the brake on each wheel.
 When the ASC is activated, you may feel a CAUTION
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-  For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch
ing sound from the engine compartment. NOTE should be operated when your vehicle is
This indicates that the system is operating  The skid control function operates at speeds stopped.
normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
 When the anti-lock braking system warning normal circumstances.
light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
ASC OFF switch
N00559400254 NOTE
Traction control function The ASC is automatically activated when the  Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both
the stability control function and the traction
N00559200076 ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
control function.
On slippery surfaces, the traction control or the operation mode is put in ON. You can
function prevents the drive wheels from spin-

NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 When moving out of mud, sand or fresh  The indicator may turn on when you start  The system may be malfunctioning.
snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
the engine. This means that the battery volt-
allow the engine speed to increase. In such engine.
age momentarily dropped when the engine
situations, temporarily turning off ASC with Restart the engine and check whether the
was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-
the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to indicator goes out. If they go out, there is no
tion, provided that the display goes out
move out your vehicle. abnormal condition. If they do not go out or
immediately.
 If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-
 When a compact spare tire has been put on
appear frequently, it is not necessary to stop
the vehicle immediately, but you should have
5
your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire
taken operation protection function” will your vehicle inspected by an authorized
will be lower, making it more likely that the
activate and the ASC will turn back on. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
indicator will blink. of your choice as soon as possible.
ASC operation indicator or

ASC OFF indicator ASC warning indicator Towing
N00546500118
N00546600119 N00546300031
ASC operation indicator If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-

-
The indicator will blink when the tem, the following indicator will turn on.
CAUTION
ASC is operating.  When towing the vehicle with only the front
ASC OFF indicator wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the
- - ASC indicator ground, do not place the ignition switch in
This indicator will turn on when the
the “ON” position or do not put the operation
ASC is turned off with the “ASC - ASC OFF indicator mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in
OFF” switch. the “ON” position or putting the operation
mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate,
resulting in an accident.
CAUTION Note that the correct towing method depends
on the transmission type and the vehicle’s
 When indicator blinks, ASC is operating,
drive configuration.
which means that the road is slippery or that For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12.
your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip.
If this happens, drive slower with less accel-
erator input.

Cruise control (if so equipped)
Cruise control (if so equipped) NOTE C- RES + switch

N00518300573  Your speed may increase to more than the set
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use Used to increase the set speed and to return to
Cruise control is an automatic speed control the brake to control your speed. As a result, the original set speed.
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti- the set speed driving is deactivated.
vated at speeds from about 25 mph D- CANCEL switch
(40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at Cruise control switches
5 speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). Used to deactivate the set speed driving.
CAUTION NOTE
 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,  When operating the cruise control switches,
turn off the cruise control for safety. press the cruise control switches correctly.
The set speed driving may be deactivated
 Do not use cruise control when driving con-
automatically if two or more switches of the
ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads cruise control are pressed at the same time.
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
 On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, To activate
do not move the gearshift lever to the “N” N00518400385
(Neutral) position while driving at a set 1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” posi-
speed without depressing the clutch pedal. tion or the operation mode is in ON, press
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
The engine will run too fast and might be the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
damaged. Used to turn on and off the cruise control. (A) to turn on the cruise control. The indi-
cator in the meter cluster will come on.
NOTE B- SET - switch
 Cruise control may not be able to keep your Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
speed on uphills or downhills. desired speed.
 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed.


To increase your speed in small amounts,
NOTE press the RES + switch for less than about 1
 When you release the SET - switch, the vehi-
second and release it.
cle speed will be set.
Each time you press the RES + switch, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
To increase the set speed

N00518500344
Accelerator pedal
There are 2 ways to increase the set speed. 5
While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
RES + switch then press the SET - switch (B) and release
Indicator the switch momentarily to set a new desired
Press and hold the RES + switch (C) while cruising speed.
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
speed, then press and release the SET - set.
switch (B) when the indicator is illumi-
nated. The vehicle will then maintain the
desired speed.
To decrease the set speed

N00518600273
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.


then press the SET - switch (B) and release
SET - switch
the switch momentarily to set a new desired
cruising speed.
Press and hold the SET - switch (B) while
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
slow down gradually.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
5 set.
To temporarily decrease the speed
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the

speed. To return to the previously set speed,
To temporarily increase or press the RES + switch (C).
decrease the speed Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
N00541700056 5-57.
To slow down your speed in small amounts, To temporarily increase the speed
press the SET - switch for less than about 1
second and release it.
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
Each time you press the SET - switch, your
normally. When you release the pedal, you
vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph (1.6
will return to your set speed.
km/h).
Brake pedal
While driving at the set speed, use the brake

pedal, which disengages the cruise control,


 When the active stability control (ASC)
To deactivate starts operating.
To resume the set speed
N00518801634 N00518900306
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
The set speed driving can be deactivated as on page 5-51. If the set speed driving is deactivated by the
follows: condition described in “To deactivate” on
page 5-57, you can resume the previously set
 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF WARNING speed by pressing the RES + switch (C) while
switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned  On vehicles equipped with continuously driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
off.) variable transmission (CVT), although the
or higher. 5
 Press the CANCEL switch (D). set speed driving will be deactivated when
 Depress the brake pedal. shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position,
never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving.
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

vated automatically when the engine speed
rises and approaches the tachometer’s red
zone (the red-colored part of the tachometer
dial).
Under either of the following conditions,

CAUTION however, using the switch does not allow you
The set speed driving is deactivated automati-  When the set speed driving is deactivated to resume the previously set speed. In these
cally in any of the following ways. automatically in any situation other than situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
those listed above, there may be a system
 When you depress the clutch pedal (on malfunction.  The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
vehicles equipped with manual transaxle). Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch is pressed.
 When your speed slows to about 10 mph switch to turn off the cruise control and have
 [Except for vehicles equipped with the
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed your vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility F.A.S.T.-key]
because of a hill, etc. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
of your choice.
 When your speed slows to about 25 mph “ACC” position.
(40 km/h) or less. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)

Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.
 Indicator is turned OFF.
WARNING Tire pressure monitoring sys-
 The compact spare wheel does not have a tem warning light
tire inflation pressure sensor. N00532701363
Tire pressure monitoring When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-
sure monitoring system will not work
system (if so equipped) properly.
N00530201612 See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
5 The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels
to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The
system only indicates when a tire is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. NOTE
 The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
substitute for regularly checking tire infla-
tion pressures.
Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures When the ignition switch is turned to the
as described in “Tires” on page 9-12. “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
 The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is ON, the tire pressure monitoring system
installed in the illustrated location.
warning light normally illuminates and goes
Replace rubber air valve (B) with a new one
when the tire is replaced.
off a few seconds later.
For details, please contact your authorized
If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated,
the warning light will remain illuminated
while the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON.
Refer to “If the warning light illuminates
while driving” on page 5-60 and take the nec-
essary measures.


Each tire, including the spare, should be the system is not operating properly. The
CAUTION checked monthly when cold and inflated to TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
 If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-
the inflation pressure recommended by the with the low tire pressure telltale.
ing light does not illuminate when the igni-
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard When the system detects a malfunction, the
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
the operation mode is put in ON, it means or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehi- telltale will flash for approximately one min-
that the tire pressure monitoring system is cle has tires of a different size than the size ute and then remain continuously illuminated.
not working properly. Have the system indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla- This sequence will continue upon subsequent
tion pressure label, you should determine the vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) exists.
5
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the As an added safety feature, your vehicle has When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
system may be preventing the monitoring of been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring nated, the system may not be able to detect or
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire signal low tire pressure as intended.
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
pressure telltale when one or more of your TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
 If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
tires is significantly under-inflated. of reasons, including the installation of
sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
monitoring system warning light will blink
for approximately 1 minute and then remain tale illuminates, you should stop and check vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-
continuously illuminated. The warning light your tires as soon as possible, and inflate ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
will issue further warnings each time the them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig- function telltale after replacing one or more
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
exists. overheat and can lead to tire failure. the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
Check to see whether the warning light goes Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
off after few minutes driving. and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- erly.
If it then goes off during driving, there is no cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
problem.
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
However, if the warning light does not go
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
system may be preventing the monitoring of low tire pressure telltale.
the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
the warning light appears while driving, Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
high-speed driving.


2. If the tire pressure monitoring system
If the warning light illuminates warning light remains illuminated after
NOTE
while driving you have been driving for approximately  Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray
on any tire.
N00532801566 20 minutes after you adjust the tire infla-
Such a spray could damage the tire inflation
1. If the tire pressure monitoring system tion pressure, one or more of the tires may pressure sensors.
warning light illuminates, avoid hard have a puncture. Inspect the tire and if it Have any puncture repaired by an authorized
braking, sharp steering maneuvers and has a puncture, have it repaired by an Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
high speeds. You should stop and adjust authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
5 the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible. The tire pressure monitoring system may not
soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at work normally in the following circum-
the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page stances:
9-12. WARNING
 If the warning light illuminates while you  A wireless facility or device using the
are driving, avoid hard braking, sharp
NOTE steering maneuvers and high speeds.
same frequency is near the vehicle.
 When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-  Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
Driving with an under-inflated tire
sure, do not apply excessive force to the and/or on the wheels.
adversely affects vehicle performance and
valve stem to avoid breakage.
can result in an accident.
 The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- is dead.
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the  Wheels other than Mitsubishi Motors
valve stem. Genuine wheels are being used.
Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
CAUTION
 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-
get into the valve, resulting in damage to the  The warning light may not illuminate imme-
diately in the event of a tire blowout or rapid tion pressure sensors are being used.
tire inflation pressure sensor.
leak.  Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
 Do not use metal valve caps, which may
rized by the vehicle are used.
cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
 Compact spare tire is fitted on a road
sors. NOTE wheel.
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-  To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-  A window tint that affects the radio wave
ing light will go off after a few minutes of tion pressure sensors, have any punctured signals is installed.
driving. tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor is
not covered by your warranty.

NOTE General information Rear-view camera (if so

 Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi- N00533000236
equipped)
ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to Your tire pressure monitoring system oper- N00546201327
large variations in ambient temperature, the
ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
(causing the warning light come on) when
the ambient temperature is relatively low. If (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry is in the “R” position with the ignition switch
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). or the operation mode is in ON, the rear-view
the warning light comes on, adjust the tire
inflation pressure. This device complies with part 15 of FCC image will be displayed on the screen of the 5
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt DISPLAY AUDIO or the Smartphone Link
RSS standard(s). Display Audio.
Whenever the tires and wheels Operation is subject to the following two con- When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
ditions. is shifted out of the “R” position, the rear-
are replaced with new ones view image will go off.
N00532900153  This device may not cause harmful inter-
If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure ference
WARNING
sensors are installed, their ID codes must be
 Never rely solely on the rear-view camera
programmed into the tire pressure monitoring received, including interference that may
to clear the area behind your vehicle.
system. Have tire and wheel replacement per- cause undesired operation. Always check visually behind and all
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors around your vehicle for persons, animals,
dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire WARNING obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to
inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel do so can result in vehicle damage, serious
 Changes or modifications not expressly
replacement is not done by an authorized approved by the manufacturer for compli-
injury or death.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by ance could void the user’s authority to  The rear-view camera is an aid system for
your warranty. operate the equipment. backing up, but it is not a substitute for
your visual confirmation.
 The view on the screen is limited, and
CAUTION objects outside the view, such as under the
 The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent bumper or around either corner of the
the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure bumper, cannot be seen on the screen.
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
the sensors.

Location of rear-view camera Reference lines on the screen CAUTION

 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
The rear-view camera (A) is built-in to the Reference lines and upper surface of the rear lens. As a result, images and distances shown
trunk lid. bumper (A) are displayed on the screen. on the screen are not exact.
 Actual distance may be different from dis-
 The red line (B) indicates approximately tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper. depending on the loading condition of the
5  The Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the
vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle
vehicle body. width are based on a level, flat road surface.
 Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis- In the following cases, objects shown on the
tance from the rear bumper. screen will appear to be farther off than they
actually are.
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
down with the weight of passengers and
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1)
• When there is an upward slope at the back.
(Case 2)
CAUTION
 If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
Case 1
lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
clean, soft cloth.
 To avoid damaging the camera;
• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
it by using an abrasive compound. 1: Approximately at the rear edge of the
• Do not disassemble the camera. rear bumper
• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens. 2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
• Do not spray the camera and its surround- 3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) A- Actual objects
ings with high-pressure water. B- Objects shown on the screen
• Make sure that the trunk lid is securely
closed when backing up.

Instrument cluster
Case 2 Instrument cluster

N00519001428
A- Actual objects 5
B- Objects shown on the screen
CAUTION NOTE
 The reference lines for distance and vehicle  Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
1- Tachometer  P.5-64
width are intended to indicate the distance to  Under certain circumstances, it may become
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
2- Multi-information display  P.5-64
difficult to see an image on the screen, even
They may not indicate correct distance when the system is functioning correctly.
3- Speedometer  P.5-63
depending on the shape of an obstacle. • In a dark area, such as at night.
4- Multi-information display switch
For example, when there is an object behind • When water drops or condensation are on
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting the lens.
in the direction of the vehicle, the reference
• When sun light or headlights shine directly Speedometer
lines on the screen will indicate that point A into the lens. N00519101302
is the farthest point and point B is the closest
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in
are actually the same distance from the vehi- miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
cle, and point C is farther off than point A (km/h).
and B.

Multi-information display
Type A Type D CAUTION

 The red zone indicates an engine speed
beyond the range of safe operation.
Select the correct shift position (manual
transaxle) or selector position (CVT) to con-
trol the engine speed so that the tachometer
indicator does not enter the red zone.
5
Type B
Tachometer
N00519201332
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per

minute. This allows the driver to determine
the most efficient selector position and engine
speed combinations. Multi-information display
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine N00555001389
performance. The multi-information display includes the

odometer, trip odometer, service reminder,
fuel remaining, selector lever position, aver-
Type C age fuel consumption, driving range, etc.

1- Information display  P.5-66

2- Frozen road warning (if so equipped)
 P.5-69
3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-69
4- Selector lever position display (if so
equipped)  P.5-43
NOTE
 When the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in OFF, the selector lever position
display, fuel remaining display and frozen
road warning are not displayed.

Information display
N00574801054
Each time you lightly press the multi-information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.
1- Odometer  P.5-67 5- Driving range display  P.5-68 9- Service reminder (month)  P.5-70
2- Trip odometer  P.5-67 6- Average fuel consumption display 
3- P.5-68
Trip odometer  P.5-67
7- Outside temperature display (if so
4- Instrument panel light dimmer control
equipped)  P.5-68
 P.5-67
8- Service reminder (distance)  P.5-70
NOTE
 When the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display and outside temperature display are
not displayed.
 While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch.

NOTE
 When the parking lights are not illuminated, the instrument panel light dimmer control is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display
switch.
Odometer If trip odometer is displayed, only trip

Bright Dim
N00574900016 odometer will be reset.
The odometer indicates the total distance the
vehicle has traveled. NOTE 5
 Both trip odometers and can count
up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
Trip odometer When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9
N00575000014
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo-
The trip odometer indicates the distance trav- meters.
eled between two points.  When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
memories of trip odometer displays and 1- Brightness level
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip are cleared, and their displays return to 2- Multi-information display switch
odometer “0.0 miles/kilometers”.
It is possible to measure two currently trav-
eled distances, from home using trip odom- NOTE
Instrument panel light dimmer  When the parking lights are illuminated, you
eter and from a particular point on the
can adjust to 8 levels.
way using trip odometer . control  Each time you reduce two brightness levels,
N00575101025 the segment display of the brightness level
Turn the parking lights on and press the decreases by one segment.
To reset the trip odometer multi-information display switch (2), there is  If you press and hold the switch for longer
a sound and the brightness changes. than about 1 second, the brightness automati-
cally scrolls through its different levels, and
To return the display to 0, hold down the stops scrolling when you release the switch.
multi-information display switch for about 1 Select your desired level of brightness.
second or more. Only the currently displayed
value will be reset.
Example
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The brightness level of the instruments is  The display setting can be changed to the  Average fuel consumption may vary depend
stored when the ignition switch is turned to preferred units (miles or km). on the driving conditions (road conditions,
the “OFF” position or the operation mode is Refer to “Changing the function settings” on how you drive, etc.).
put in OFF. page 5-71. The actual fuel consumption may differ from
the fuel consumption displayed, so treat the
fuel consumption displayed as just a rough
Driving range display Average fuel consumption dis-
5 N00575201042
play
guideline.
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
This displays the approximate driving range N00575300017 from memory the manual reset mode or auto
(how many more miles or kilometers you can reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
This displays the average fuel consumption
drive). When the driving range falls below sumption display.
from the last reset to the present.
approximately 30 miles (50 km), “---” is dis-  The display setting can be changed to the
The reset mode conditions for the average preferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}.
played. fuel consumption display can be switched Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. page 5-71.
NOTE For information on how to change the aver-
 The driving range is determined based on the age fuel consumption display setting, refer to
fuel consumption data. This may vary “Changing the function settings” on page Outside temperature display (if
depending on the driving conditions and hab- 5-71. so equipped)
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a N00556501134
rough guideline.
 When you refuel, the driving range display is
NOTE Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
updated.  The average fuel consumption display can be
However, if you only add a small amount of reset separately in both auto reset mode and
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. manual reset mode. NOTE
 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-  The display setting can be changed to the
Fill to a full tank whenever possible.
sumption cannot be measured. preferred units (°F or °C).
 When your vehicle is stopped on an
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
extremely steep hill, the driving range value
mode”. page 5-71.
may change. This is due to the movement of
 Depending on factors such as the driving
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any
conditions, the displayed temperature may
breakdown.
vary from the actual outside temperature.

turned to the “ON” position or the operation
Frozen road warning (if so mode is changed to ON.
equipped) When the remaining fuel level runs very low
N00579000041 (no segments displayed), the bar graph
flashes.
If the outside air temperature drops below
If the warning display appears, refuel as soon
approx. 37 °F (3 °C), the alarm sounds and
as possible.
the outside air temperature warning symbol
(A) flashes for about 10 seconds. 5
1- Full
0- Empty
NOTE
 It may take several seconds to stabilize the
display after refilling the tank.
 If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
the operation mode in ON, the remaining
fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel NOTE
level.
 On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
CAUTION  The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
 There is a danger the road might be icy, even tank filler door is located on the left side of
when this symbol is not flashing, so please the vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank”
take care when driving. on page 3-3.)
CAUTION
 Running out of gas could damage the cata-
lytic converter. If the warning display
Fuel remaining display Fuel remaining warning display appears, refuel as soon as possible.
N00575401031
The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel When the remaining fuel level runs low (one
level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch segment is displayed), the last segment of the
or the operation mode in ON. fuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is

Service reminder NOTE To reset

N00556701312  Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
Displays the approximate time until the next km) and the time in units of 1 month. The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
recommended periodic inspection. “---” is tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
displayed when the inspection time has 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
arrived. tion is due. Contact an authorized 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- tion display switch a few times, the infor-
5 NOTE ity of your choice to have the system mation display switches to the service
checked. reminder display.
 The service reminder time can be modified
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi- displays the time until the next periodic
cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For inspection.
further information, please contact your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE
 When the next periodic inspection is
approaching, the wrench symbol will be dis-
Distance played whenever the ignition switch is
turned from the “OFF” position to the “ON”
position or when the operation mode is
changed from OFF to ON.
The wrench symbol will continuously be dis- 2. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
Month played, even on non-service reminder display switch for about 1 second or more to
plays (odometer, trip meter, etc.), until the make the wrench symbol start flashing. (If
service reminder is reset.
there is no operation for about 10 seconds
When the service reminder resets, the
with flashing, the display will revert to its
wrench symbol will not be displayed until
the next periodic inspection. original indication.)
1. Shows the time until the next periodic

inspection.

3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
press the multi-information meter switch,
NOTE tion display switch a few times, the infor-
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
the display switches from “---” to mation display switches to the driving
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
“cLEAr”. After that, the time until the range display.
play is reset and the time until the next
next periodic inspection is shown. periodic inspection is displayed. Refer to “Information display” on page
 If you accidentally reset the display, consult 5-66.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for 2. Each time you press the multi-information
display switch for 1 second or more on
assistance.
driving range display, you can switch
5
reset mode for average fuel consumption.
Changing the function settings (A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset
N00556801267
mode)
The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”,
“Fuel consumption unit” and “Temperature
unit” setting can be modified as desired, Auto reset mode Manual reset mode
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is ON.
CAUTION
 The customer is responsible for making sure
that regular inspections and maintenance and
CAUTION
 The driver should not operate the display
periodic inspections and maintenance are
while the vehicle is in motion.
performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-  When operating the system, stop the vehicle
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc- in a safe area.
tions.
Manual reset mode
Changing the reset mode for aver-
 When the average fuel consumption is
NOTE age fuel consumption being displayed, if you hold down the
 The “---” display cannot be reset while the N00575501032
multi-information display switch, these
ignition switch or the operation mode is in You can change the mode condition for the calculations will be reset to zero.
ON.
average fuel consumption display to “Auto  When the following operation is per-
reset” or “Manual reset”. formed, the mode setting changes auto-
matically from manual to auto.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the 3. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
F.A.S.T.-key]
NOTE play switch to switch in sequence from
 The average fuel consumption display can be
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- “km/L”  “L/100 km”  “mpg” 
reset separately for the auto reset mode and
tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position. “km/L”.
for the manual reset mode.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
key]
reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
Change the operation mode to ON from
5 ACC or OFF.
sumption display.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.
Auto reset mode
 When the average fuel consumption is Changing the fuel consumption

being displayed, if you hold down the
display unit
multi-information display switch, these
N00557100156
calculations will be reset to zero.
 When the engine switch or the operation The fuel consumption display unit can be
changed. The distance and amount units are NOTE
mode is in the following conditions, the
also switched to match the selected fuel con-  The display units for the driving range, the
average fuel consumption display will average fuel consumption are changed, but
automatically reset. sumption unit.
the units for the indicating needle (speedom-
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa- eter), the odometer, the trip odometer and the
[Except for vehicles equipped with the service reminder will remain unchanged.
F.A.S.T.-key] tion display switch a few times, the infor-
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
The ignition switch has been set to the mation display switches to the average
the unit setting is erased and it returns auto-
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4 fuel consumption display.
matically to factory setting.
hours or more. Refer to “Information display” on page
5-66.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- 2. Press and hold the multi-information dis- The distance units is also changed in the fol-
key] play switch for about 5 seconds or more lowing combinations to match the selected
The operation mode has been set to ACC until buzzer sound is heard twice. fuel consumption unit.
or OFF for about 4 hours or more.

Distance
Fuel consumption
(driving range)
km/L km
L/100 km km
mpg mile (s)
Changing the temperature unit (if 5

so equipped)
N00557201183
The temperature display unit can be switched.
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-

tion display switch a few times, the infor-
mation display switches to the outside
temperature display.
Refer to “Information display” on page
5-66.
2. Each time you press the multi-information
display switch for 5 seconds or more on
outside temperature display, you can
switch from °F to °C or from °C to °F unit
of outside temperature display.
NOTE
 The temperature value on air conditioning
panel is switched in conjunction with outside
temperature display unit of the multi-infor-
mation display.
However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to tem-
perature display of an air conditioning.

Indicator and warning light package
Indicator and warning light package

N00519801947
1- High beam indicator  P.5-75 9- Low coolant temperature indicator 17- Cruise control indicator (if so
2- Electric power steering system warning (green)  P.5-75 equipped)  P.5-54
light  P.5-50 10- Oil pressure warning light  P.5-77 18- Active stability control (ASC) indica-
3- Tire pressure monitoring system warn- 11- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER- tor/warning light  P.5-53
ing light (if so equipped)  P.5-58 VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check 19- Washer fluid level warning light (if so
4- Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning engine light”)  P.5-76 equipped)  P.5-78
lights  P.5-75 12- Charging system warning light 20- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
5- Front fog light indicator (if so P.5-77 indicator/warning light  P.5-53
equipped)  P.5-75 13- Brake warning light  P.5-75 21- Position indicator (if so equipped)
6- Door-ajar warning light  P.5-77 14- Anti-lock braking system warning light P.5-75
7- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)  P.5-49 22- ECO indicator  P.5-75
warning light  P.4-28 15- Multi-information display  P.5-64 23- For details, refer to “Warning activa-
8- High coolant temperature warning light 16- Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning tion” on page 5-14 (if so equipped)
(red)  P.5-77 light  P.4-11

Indicators
24- For details, refer to “Warning activa-
Front fog light indicator (if so Warning lights
tion” on page 5-14 (if so equipped)
equipped) N00520300147
Indicators
N00520200175
Brake warning light and buzzer

N00519900127 This indicator comes on while the front fog
N00520400526
lights are on.
This light comes on when the ignition switch
Turn signal indicators/Hazard
warning lights Position indicator (if so equipped)
is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or 5
the operation mode is put in ON.
N00520000216 N00551301049 When the engine is started, the light should
The arrows will flash in time with the corre- go off a few seconds later.
This indicator light illuminates while the
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn The warning light also illuminates after start-
parking lights are on.
signal lever is used. ing the engine under the following condi-
tions.
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn- Low coolant temperature indi-
ing flasher switch is pressed.  When the parking brake is still applied.
cator - green
 When the brake fluid level is low.
N00575600010
 When the brake system circuit is not
NOTE This indicator comes on in green while the working properly.
 If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if coolant temperature is low.
the indicator stays on without flashing, check
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
turn signal connection. NOTE mph (8 km/h) and the parking brake applied,
 When the indicator goes out, this should be a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that
used as a rough indication of when the heat- the parking brake is not properly release.
ing starts working.
High beam indicator Before driving, be sure that the parking brake
N00520100086 is fully released and the brake warning light
A blue light comes on when the headlights is off.
ECO indicator
are on high beam. N00568800036
This indicator comes on while fuel-efficient

driving is achieved.

Warning lights
CAUTION Engine malfunction indicator CAUTION

 If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”  Driving for a long time with the engine mal-
braking system warning light are illuminated function indicator on may cause more dam-
at the same time, the braking force distribu- or “Check engine light”) age to the emission control system. This
tion function will not operate, the vehicle N00520500804
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil-
may be destabilized during sudden braking This indicator is a part of the onboard diag- ity.
under the following conditions. nostic (OBD) system which monitors the  If this indicator does not come on when the
5 • When the brake warning light does not go
out even when the parking brake is
emissions, engine control system or continu- ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have
ously variable transmission (CVT) control
released. the system checked at an authorized
system. If a problem is detected in one of
• When the brake warning light stays on Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
these systems, this indicator illuminates or
while driving. of your choice.
flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to
If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking  If the engine malfunction indicator comes on
the “ON” position or the operation mode is while the engine is running, avoid driving at
and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact an authorized put in ON, this indicator normally comes on high speeds.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility and goes off after the engine has started. During vehicle operation with the indicator
of your choice as soon as possible. on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
This indicator will come on if the fuel tank depress the accelerator pedal.
following manner when brake performance filler cap is not properly tightened. If this When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-
is deteriorated. indicator comes on and stays on after refuel- cator on, you must depress the brake pedal
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is more firmly than usual since the engine
you press down on the brake pedal harder properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal until you hear clicking sounds.) cle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to
may go all the way to the floor. If this indicator does not go off after several creep forward.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking seconds or lights up while driving, have the
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the system checked as soon as possible at an
parking brake. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the repair facility of your choice.
stop lights and to alert the vehicles behind
you.

Warning lights
NOTE Oil pressure warning light CAUTION

 Do not disconnect the battery cable when the N00520700170  If the light comes on during vehicle opera-
engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE This light comes on when the engine oil pres- tion, it indicates that the engine is possibly
ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is overheating. Continued driving could make
sure is below normal. If the light stays on
on. the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle
while driving, stop the engine as soon as pos-
The engine electronic control module stores in a safe place and take appropriate action.
critical OBD information (especially exhaust sible. Do not run the engine until the cause of (Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.)
the low oil pressure is corrected.
emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
tery cable is disconnected while the engine
5
malfunction indicator is on. This will make it CAUTION NOTE
difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
 If this light comes on when the engine oil  The high coolant temperature warning light
lems.
level is not low, have your vehicle checked at may illuminate when the vehicle has been
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This
repair facility of your choice. illuminating does not necessarily indicate a
Charging system warning light  This warning light does not show the amount problem. It should stop if you keep the
N00520600313 of oil in the crankcase. This can only be engine running for a while or continue driv-
determined by checking the oil level with the ing the vehicle.
This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
dipstick with the engine turned off.
tion in the charging system or when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
(engine off) or the operation mode is put in Door-ajar warning light and
ON. When the engine is started, the light High coolant temperature buzzer
should go out. Check to make sure that the warning light - red N00520901342
light has gone out before driving. N00575700011

This light comes on when any door is open or
This light comes on in red if the coolant tem- not completely closed.
CAUTION perature becomes excessively high. When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
 If the warning light stays on while the engine mph (8 km/h) and any door is open or ajar, a
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place tone will sound 4 times to inform the driver
as soon as possible and contact an authorized that any door is not properly shut.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice to have the system checked.
CAUTION
 Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar
warning light is off.

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

The daytime running lights will be illumi-
NOTE nated:
 When the auto cut-out function of the doom
light is been activated, the light goes out
The daytime running lights illumi-
automatically after about 30 minutes. OFF
Refer to “Dome light” on page 5-92. nated
The daytime running lights illumi-
nated
5 Washer fluid level warning Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and
light (if so equipped)
instrument panel lights on
N00590300021
Headlights and other lights on
This light comes on when the washer fluid is The combinations of switch operations and
running low. illuminated lights differ in accordance with
the following conditions.
If the light comes on, replenish the container NOTE
with washer fluid. Refer to “Washer fluid” on  Once the daytime running light come on,
Except for vehicles equipped with day-
page 9-9. they do not go out until the ignition switch is
time running lights
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
Combination headlights and OFF All lights off
ACC.
dimmer switch Parking, tail, front and rear side-
N00522501889
marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on [When the engine is not running, or when the
engine is running but the parking brake is not
Headlights Headlights and other lights on released]
Rotate the switch to operate the lights. The engine starts when the lights are off.
Vehicles equipped with daytime running
lights OFF All lights off
[When the engine is started, and the parking Parking, tail, front and rear side-
brake is released] marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on

Combination headlights and dimmer switch

The operation mode is changed to OFF or
NOTE When you want to keep the lights
ACC and the driver’s door is opened.
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights on:
on for a long period of time when the engine
 If the following operation is performed
is not running. The battery will run down.
with the combination headlights and dim- If the combination headlights and dimmer
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position, switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-
becomes foggy. This is the same as when the lights automatically turn off after tion again after the engine is turned off, the
about 3 minutes. about 3-minute auto-cutout function
window glass mists up on a humid day, and
does not indicate a problem. When the light described above will not work. The lights (the
5
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. [Except for vehicles equipped with the parking lights, tail lights and license plate
However, if water collects inside the light, F.A.S.T.-key] lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto-
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” matically.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your or “ACC” position or the key is removed
choice. from the ignition switch and the driver’s
door is not opened. Headlight reminder buzzer
N00549800226
Light auto-cutout function [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- [When using a key to start the engine]
key] If the driver’s door is opened with the key in
(headlights and other lights)
The operation mode is changed to OFF or the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed
N00532600570
ACC and the driver’s door is not opened. from the ignition switch while the lights are
 If the following operation is performed
with the combination headlights and dim- on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn
NOTE off the lights.
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
the lights automatically turn off.  The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-
[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
vated.
engine]
[Except for vehicles equipped with the See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details. If the driver’s door is opened with the opera-
F.A.S.T.-key]
tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
operation mode is changed to OFF while the
or “ACC” position or the key is removed
lights are on, the tone will sound to remind
from the ignition switch and the driver’s
you to turn off the lights.
door is opened.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- In either case, the lights will turn off automat-
key] ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn

Turn signal lever

the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop go back to normal when you let go. While the
the tone. high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
the instrument panel.
Dimmer (high/low beam
change) NOTE
N00549900142
 You can flash the high beams by pulling the
lever toward you, even if the light switch is
To change the headlights from high beam to
5 low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
off.
 If you turn the lights off with the head lights
lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low set to high-beam illumination, the headlights
beam as a courtesy whenever there are are automatically returned to their low-beam
oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic setting when the light switch is next turned
moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue to the “ ” position. NOTE
light in the instrument cluster indicates when  A light in the instrument panel flashes to
the headlights are on high beam. show when the turn signal lights are working
properly.
Turn signal lever If this light flashes faster than usual, check
N00522600519 for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual functioning connection in the signal.
turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi- If the panel light does not come on when the
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
tion (1). It will return to the neutral position
burned out bulb in the panel.
when you let go. Use the full position (2) Have the system inspected by your autho-
when making a normal turn. The lever will rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
return to the neutral position when the turn is facility of your choice.
complete. There may be times when the lever  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
does not return to the neutral position. This • Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
usually happens when the steering wheel is function for lane changes.
turned only slightly. You can easily return the • Adjust the time required to operate the
lever by hand. lever for the 3-flash function.
Headlight flasher Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly • Changing of the tone of a sounding buzzer
N00550000185 then release it, the turn signal lights and the as the turn signal lights flash.
You can flash the high beams by pulling the indicator light in the instrument cluster will
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will flash three times.

Hazard warning flasher switch

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details. Front fog light switch (if so NOTE
 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or
equipped)
“ ” position while the front fog lights are
Hazard warning flasher N00522800393
illuminated, they will automatically turn off.
switch The front fog lights illuminate only when the They can be turned back on again by rotating
the combination headlights and dimmer
N00522700318 headlights are on low beam.
Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON” switch back to “ ” position, and turning
position turns on the front fog lights as well the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi- 5
as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To tion.
turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of  Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
the “OFF” position.
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
The knob will return to the neutral position
when it is released.
Wiper and washer switch
N00523001748
CAUTION
If you press the flasher switch, the turn sig-  If the washer is used in cold weather, the
nals will flash intermittently, and so will the washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
hazard warning lights. This is an emergency freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
warning system and should not be used when the glass with the defroster before using the
washer.
the vehicle is in motion, except for emergen-
cies.
If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
will keep working after the ignition switch is Windshield wipers
removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.
NOTE The windshield wiper and washer can be
 If the headlights are switched to high beam,
NOTE operated with the ignition switch or the oper-
the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
 If the flashers are used for several hours, the ation mode is in ON or ACC.
minate again when the headlights are
battery will run down. This could make it switched back to low beam. If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do
difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle. not operate the wipers until the ice has melted

Wiper and washer switch

and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
motor may be damaged.
A
1- Fast
2- Slow
Windshield washer
MIST- Misting function N00504600298
The wipers will operate once. NOTE To turn on the windshield washer, pull the
OFF- Off  The speed-sensitive-operation function of lever toward you with the ignition switch or
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive) the windshield wipers can be deactivated. the operation mode is in ON or ACC.
LO- Slow For further information, please contact your The wipers will wipe automatically several
HI- Fast authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
times when the washer fluid is sprayed.
repair facility of your choice.
To turn off the spray, release the lever.
To adjust intermittent intervals Misting function
With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive The misting function can be used when the
intermittent operation) position, the intermit- ignition switch or the operation mode is in
tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the ON or ACC.
knob (A). The wipers will operate once if the wiper
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and
released. This operation is useful when it is
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
position.

Electric rear window defogger switch
Precautions to observe when NOTE Type 1

using wipers and washers  Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
N00523501349
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or
CAUTION the pump may fail.
 During cold weather, add a recommended
 If the washer is used in cold weather, washer
fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze, washer solution that will not freeze in the
blocking your view. Heat the glass with the
washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer
may not work or may be damaged.
5
defroster before using the washer.
 Replace the wiper blades when they are
worn. Use the proper size replacement
blades. For further information, please con-
NOTE tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors Type 2
 Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dealer.
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
wiper blades prematurely.
 Before using the wipers in cold weather, Electric rear window defog-
check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers
ger switch
N00523701484
while the blades are frozen could cause the
wiper motor to burn out. The rear window defogger can be used when
 If the moving wipers become blocked part- the engine is running.
way through a sweep by ice or other deposits The indicator light (A) will come on when
on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop you press the electric rear window defogger
operating to prevent the motor from over- After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys-
switch. Electric current will flow through the
heating. In this case, park the vehicle in a tem will shut off automatically.
heating wires on the rear window to help
safe place, turn the ignition switch to the To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-
clear away moisture or frost.
“OFF” position or put the operation mode in utes have passed, press the switch again. The
OFF, and then remove the ice or other depos- indicator light will go out and the defogger
its. will turn off.
Because the wipers will start operating again If you need the defogger for more than 20
after the wiper motor cools down, check that minutes, press the switch again. This will add
the wipers operate before using them.
20 more minutes.

Horn switch
CAUTION USB input terminal

 The rear window defogger is not designed to N00566701171
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
You can connect your USB memory device or
before using the rear window defogger.
iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
 Use the rear window defogger only after the
engine has started and is running. Be sure to
memory device or iPod.
turn the defogger switch off immediately This section explains how to connect and
remove a USB memory device or iPod.
5 after the window is clear to save on battery
power. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
 Do not place stickers, tape, or other items details on the types of connectable devices
that are attached with adhesive over the grid and supported files, and how to play music
wires on the rear window. files.
 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid Link System (if so equipped) *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
wires. N00563701196 Inc. in the United States and other countries.
The Link System takes control of the devices

WARNING
NOTE connected via the USB input terminal or the
 Do not perform to connect/disconnect the
 If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir- Bluetooth®; the system allows the connected USB memory device or iPod while driving.
rors, mist can also be removed from the out- devices to be operated by using the switches This can be dangerous.
side rearview mirrors when the rear window in the vehicle or voice commands (if so Be sure to perform before driving.
defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Door equipped).
mirror heater” on page 5-36.) For details on how to operate, refer to “USB
input terminal” on page 5-84 and the separate
owner’s manual.
Horn switch
N00523800185 Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark
on the steering wheel.

Sun visors
3. To disconnect the connector cable, per-
How to connect a USB memory NOTE form the installation steps in reverse.
device  Do not connect the USB memory device to
N00566801172
the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged. Sun visors
To connect N00524600353
3. To disconnect the USB connector cable, Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce
1. Connect a commercially available USB perform the installation steps in reverse. front glare while driving. To reduce side
connector cable (A) to the USB memory glare, turn the visor to the side (2). 5
device (B). How to connect an iPod
N00566901203
To connect
1. Connect the connector cable to the iPod.
NOTE
 Use a genuine connector cable from Apple
Inc.
2. Open the cover (C) and connect the oppo- 2. Open the cover (A) and connect the oppo-
site end of the USB connector cable. site end of the connector cable. Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun

visor.

12 V power outlets
12 V power outlets HomeLink® Wireless Con-

N00525001670
trol System (if so equipped)
CAUTION N00554301040
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory

HomeLink® Wireless Control System is a
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
 Also be aware that using electronic equip-
5 ment with the engine off may run the battery HomeLink® provides a convenient way to
down. replace up to 3 hand-held radio-frequency
 When the power outlet is not in use, be sure (RF) transmitters used to activate devices
to close the power outlet cover. This will pre- such as gate operators, garage door openers,
vent the power outlet from becoming entry door locks, security systems, even home
clogged and short circuiting.
Card holder lighting. Additional HomeLink® information
can be found at www.homelink.com,
Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on Accessories can be operated while the igni- www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
the sun visor. tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or calling the toll-free HomeLink®-Hotline at 1-
ACC. 800-355-3515.
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the
cover, and insert the plug in the power outlet.
WARNING
 Do not use HomeLink® with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S. Fed-
eral Regulations. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object in the path
of a closing garage door and then auto-
matically stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a
garage door opener without these features
increases the risk of serious injury or
death.

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
WARNING Programming a new Home-

 During programming, your garage door Link®
or gate may open or close. Make sure that N00584700020
people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate that you are programming. To program HomeLink® to operate a garage
door, gate, or entry door opener, home or
office lighting, you need to be at the same
NOTE location as the device. 5
 Once HomeLink® is programmed, retain the
original transmitter for future programming 1. Press the HomeLink® button that you
procedures (for example, new vehicle pur- 1- HomeLink® button 1 would like to program. The indicator light
chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the pro- (A) will flash orange slowly.
2- HomeLink® button 2
grammed HomeLink® buttons should be
erased for security purposes. Refer to 3- HomeLink® button 3
“Cleaning the programmed information” on
page 5-90.
 You can program a maximum of 3 devices. Before programming Home-
To change or replace any of the 3 devices
after it has been initially programmed, you Link®
must first erase the current settings. N00584600029
See “Cleaning the programmed information”  Some garage door openers manufactured
on page 5-90 or “Reprogramming a single after 1995 have “rolling code protection”.
HomeLink® button” on page 5-91. To program a garage door opener
equipped with “rolling code protection”;
you will need to access the garage door
opener motor to press the motor’s “Learn”
NOTE
 You do not need to continue holding the
or “Smart” buttons. For convenience, use
a ladder and another person to assist you. HomeLink® button.
 It is recommended that a new battery be  If the indicator light does not flash, refer to
“Cleaning the programmed information” on
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
page 5-90.
device being programmed to HomeLink®
for quicker training and accurate trans-
mission of the radio-frequency signal.

2. Position the end of your hand-held trans- • If the device does not operate, continue
mitter (B) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away
NOTE
 Some devices may require you to replace this
with “Programming a new HomeLink®”
from the HomeLink® button while keep- steps 5 to 7 to complete the program-
“Programming a new HomeLink®” step 3
ing the indicator light in view. ming of a rolling code equipped device.
with procedures noted in the “Gate operator /
Canadian programming” section. If the indi- 5. At the garage door opener receiver
cator light does not change to rapidly flash- (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the
ing green or continuously lit green after “Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usu-
5 performing these steps, contact HomeLink® ally be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the motor-head unit
at www.homelink.com
(see the garage door opener manual to
identify the “Learn” button.)
4. Press the HomeLink® button that was just 6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
programmed and observe the indicator “Smart” button. (The name and color of
light. the button may vary by manufacturer.)
• If the indicator light continuously illumi- There are typically 30 seconds to initiate
nates green, programming is complete step 7.
NOTE and your device should operate when the 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
 Some hand-held transmitters may actually HomeLink® button is pressed and hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-
train better from a distance of 6 to 12 inches released. grammed HomeLink® button. Repeat the
(15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you have • If the indicator light rapidly flashes
difficulty with the programming process. “press/hold/release” sequence a second
green, firmly press, hold for 2 seconds time, and, depending on the brand of the
and release the programmed HomeLink® garage door opener (or other rolling code
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” equipped device), repeat this sequence a
button while watching the indicator light sequence a second time, and, depending third time to complete the programming
(A). Continue pressing the button until the on the brand of the garage door opener process.
indicator light (A) changes from slowly (or other rolling code equipped device),
flashing orange to either rapidly flashing HomeLink® should now activate your
repeat this sequence a third time to com- rolling code equipped device.
green (rolling code) or continuously lit plete the programming process. At this
green (fixed code). Now you may release point if your device operates, program-
the hand-held transmitter button. ming is complete.

NOTE NOTE
 In the event that there are still programming  If programming a garage door opener or gate
difficulties or questions, additional Home- operator, it is advised to unplug the device
Link® information and programming videos during the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
can be found online at www.homelink.com, sible overheating.
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
calling the HomeLink® Hotline. 3. Press and release - every 2 seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the 5
HomeLink® indicator light changes from
Gate operator/Canadian pro- slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flash-
gramming ing green (rolling code) or continuously lit 1. Within 5 seconds after successfully pro-
N00584800021 green (fixed code). Now you may release the gramming the garage door opener (refer
hand-held transmitter button.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
Proceed with “Programming a new Home- to “Programming a new HomeLink®”
mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after section), both garage door operation indi-
several seconds of transmission - which may Link®” step 4 to complete. cators (A) will flash rapidly green indicat-
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick ing that the garage door feedback has
up the signal during programming. Similar to Additional steps for program- been enabled.
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators ming a door system with feed- If the indicators do not flash, perform
are designed to “time-out” in the same man- steps 2 and 3 while pressing the Home-
back
ner. Link® button up to the first 10 times after
N00584900022
The indicator LED on the hand-held transmit- successful programming.
ter will go off when the device times out indi- The HomeLink® has the capability of receiv- 2. Press and release the programmed Home-
cating that it has finished transmitting. ing garage door status from compatible Link® button to activate the door. You
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- garage door opener systems. Check your now have 1 minute in which to complete
culties programming a gate operator or garage door opener manual for the available step 3.
garage door opener by using the “Program- feature and HomeLink® compatibility. Also
ming” procedures, replace “Programming a for a listing of compatible systems contact
new HomeLink®” step 3 with the following: HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com


3. Once the door has stopped, press and The HomeLink® has the capability of listen-
release the “Learn” or “Smart” button on ing to these messages at a range up to 820.2
the garage door opener (refer to your feet (250 m) (open line of sight), but range
garage door opener owner’s manual for may be reduced by obstacles such as houses
the location of the “Learn” button). Both or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle
the HomeLink® garage door operation speed to receive the CLOSED or OPENED
indicators will flash rapidly green upon message feedback from the garage door
5 successful synchronization with the door
opener (within 5 seconds).
opener. If the unit is out of range before
receiving either the UP or DOWN message
from the door opener, both the UP and
Operating HomeLink® The indicators will illuminate/blink in
DOWN indicators will flash red followed by
a continuous lit orange indicator in the direc-
N00585000020
response to the following conditions: tion the door was last moving.
To operate, simply press and release the pro- Recall of the door state after initial feedback
grammed HomeLink® button. Activation will : Blinking : Illuminates is possible by simultaneously pressing either
now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage HomeLink® buttons 1 and 2 or buttons 2 and
door opener, gate operator, security system, Garage door opener closing 3 for 2 seconds. The last recorded message
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). (orange)
will be displayed for 3 seconds, again follow-
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of ing the garage door status indication of the
the device may also be used at any time. Garage door opener closed
(green) figure above.
Garage door feedback Out of range

(red) Clearing the programmed
N00585200022
information
The HomeLink® has the capability of receiv- Garage door opener opening
(orange) N00585300023
ing garage door status from compatible
To erase programming from the 3 buttons
garage door opener systems. Refer to “Addi- Garage door opener opened (individual buttons cannot be erased but can
tional steps for programming a door system (green)
be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), fol-
with feedback” on page 5-89.
Out of range low the steps noted:
Garage door status is then displayed with
(red)
indicators (A).

Interior lights
1. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink® NOTE CAUTION
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The indi-  If you do not complete the programming of a  The transmitter has been tested and complies
cator will change from continuous yellow new device to the button, it will revert to the with FCC and IC rules.
to rapidly flashing green. previously stored programming. Changes or modifications not expressly
2. Release both buttons. For questions or comments, visit approved by the party responsible for com-
www.homelink.com, pliance could void the user’s authority to
NOTE www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by operate the device.
 Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. calling the HomeLink® Hotline. 5
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
3. HomeLink® is now in the train (or learn- exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
ing) mode and can be programmed at any General information environment. End Users must follow the spe-
time beginning with “Programming a new N00585600026 cific operating instructions for satisfying RF
exposure compliance. This transmitter must
HomeLink®” step 1. Your HomeLink® system operates on a radio
be at least 12 inches (20 cm) from the user
frequency subject to Federal Communica-
and must not be co-located or operating in
tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
Reprogramming a single sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
conjunction with any other antenna or trans-
HomeLink® button (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
mitter.
The term “IC:” before the certification/regis-
N00585400024 complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
tration number only signifies that Industry
To reprogram a HomeLink® button, complete RSS- 210 of the Industry Canada Rules.
Canada technical specifications were met.
the following. Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® Interior lights
button. Do not release the button. N00525301644
ference.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The Home-
 This device must accept any interference NOTE
that may be received, including interfer-  Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
Link® button can be released at this point. ence that may cause undesired operation. with the engine off may run the battery
Proceed with “Programming a new down.
HomeLink®” step 2. Never leave the vehicle without checking
that the light is off.

Storage spaces
• When the remote control transmitter of
Dome light the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
NOTE
N00525801317  The time until the light goes off (delayed off)
key is used to lock the vehicle.
can be adjusted. See your authorized
• When the door lock/unlock switch is
Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
pressed to lock the vehicle while carry-
 The auto cut-out function cannot be operated
ing the F.A.S.T.-key.
Auto cut-out function when the dome light switch is in the “ ”
If the light is left switched on with the position.
5 ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “ACC” Also, this function can be deactivated. See
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
position or the operation mode is in OFF
details.
or ACC, and a door is opened, it goes off
automatically after approximately 30 min-
3- ( )
utes.
The light goes off regardless of whether a
The light will illuminate again after it
door is open or closed.
1- ( ) automatically goes off in the following
The light illuminates regardless of cases:
whether a door is open or closed. • When the ignition switch is turned to the Storage spaces
2- (•) “ON” position or the operation mode is N00526400528
Delayed off function put in ON.

The light illuminates when a door is • When the keyless entry system or the CAUTION
opened. It goes off approximately 30 sec- F.A.S.T.-key is operated.  Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,
onds after the door is closed. • When all doors are closed. or spectacles in the cabin when parking the
However, the light goes off immediately vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will
with all doors closed in the following NOTE become extremely hot, so lighters and other
flammable items may catch fire and
cases:  When the key was used to start the engine: if
unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
• When the ignition switch is turned to the the key is removed while the doors are
may rupture. The heat may also deform or
“ON” position or the operation mode is closed, the light is illuminated and after
crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-
put in ON. approximately 30 seconds it goes off.
tacle parts that are made of plastic.
• When the power door lock function is  When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the
 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
engine: if the operation mode is put in OFF
used to lock the vehicle. driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
while the doors are closed, the light illumi-
storage space could otherwise cause injuries
nates and after approximately 30 seconds it
during a sudden stop.
goes off.

Cup holders
NOTE Cup holders For the front seat

 Do not leave valuables in any storage space N00527301518
when leaving the vehicle. The cup holder is located in front of the floor
The cup holder is designed for holding cups console.
or drink-cans securely in its holes.
Glove compartment
N00551501331
WARNING
 Do not spray water or spill beverages 5
WARNING inside the vehicle. If switches, wires, or
electrical components become wet, they
 An open glove compartment door can
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
cause a serious injury or death to the front
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
up as much liquid as possible.
senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
when driving.
NOTE
To open, pull the lever (A).  Plastic bottles may sometimes not fit
securely depending on the shape of the bot- CAUTION
tle. Plastic bottles could fall if driving is  Do not drink beverages while driving your
done while a plastic bottle is not securely vehicle.
placed, so check that plastic bottles are This is distracting and could cause an acci-
placed securely or use the bottle holder. dent.
For the rear seat

N00537001215
Type 1
The cup holder is located behind the parking

brake lever.

Bottle holders
Bottle holders NOTE

N00502801075  Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
holder.
WARNING  Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
 Do not spray water or spill beverages storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
inside the vehicle. If switches, wires, or etc.
electrical components become wet, they  Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
5 could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire. ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
tles, etc.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
up as much liquid as possible.
Convenience hook
Type 2 CAUTION N00574700014
 Drink beverages while driving your vehicle
is distracting and can cause an accident. Convenience hook is located on the seatback
In order to use cup holder, allow the arm rest  Vibration and shaking while driving may of the passenger’s seat.
to drop down. cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.
There are bottle holders located on the front

doors.
NOTE
 To avoid damage to the convenience hook,
do not hang objects that weight more than 9
pounds (4 kg).

Assist grips
Assist grips
N00559000074
These grips are to support the body by hand

while seated in the vehicle.
CAUTION
 Do not use the assist grips when getting into
or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could
detach causing you to fall.

Driving safety
Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4 6
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-5
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11
Fuel economy
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to
Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
N00628800178 N00628900049
help prevent the floor mat from moving for-
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent ward and possibly interfering with the opera-
Your personal driving habits can have a sig- causes of accidents. tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
nificant effect on your fuel consumption. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired from moving forward and possibly interfering
Several recommendations for achieving the even with blood alcohol levels far below the with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi
greatest fuel economy are listed below. legal minimum. If you have been drinking, Motors Genuine floor mats are recom-
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- mended.
 Whenever accelerating from a stop,
6 always accelerate slowly and smoothly.
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
 When parked for even a short period, do ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
To install the floor mat
not idle the engine. Shut it off. Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
N00628701099
 Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary 1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the
drugs affect your alertness, perception and
stops. floorboard.
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- 2. Align the floor mat with the installation
pharmacist before driving while under the
mended pressures. holes over the retaining clips.
influence of any of these medications.
 For freeway driving, maintain a speed of 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
traffic, roadway and weather conditions
WARNING
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
safely permit.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
 Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
lubricated according to the recommenda- impaired.
tions in this manual.
 Always keep your vehicle well main-
tained. A poorly maintained engine
wastes fuel and costs money. Floor mat
 Never overload your vehicle. N00628601069
The original equipment floor mat provided

with your vehicle was specifically designed
for your vehicle. Always properly position
the floor mat and assure it does not interfere
with operation of the pedals. Always use the
6-2 Driving safety

Vehicle preparation before driving
NOTE WARNING Seat belts and seats

 The shape of the mat and the number of • While the vehicle is stopped with the
retaining clips may vary depending on the engine off, check that the floor mat is not  Before starting the vehicle, make certain
vehicle model. interfering with the pedals by depressing that you and all passengers are seated and
the pedals fully. wearing their seat belts properly (with
children in the rear seat, in appropriate
WARNING restraints), and that all the doors are
 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not locked.
properly installed, it can interfere with the  Move the driver’s seat as far backward as
operation of the pedals. Interference with possible, while keeping good visibility, 6
the pedals can cause unintended accelera- and good control of the steering wheel,
tion and/or increased stopping distances brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check
resulting in a crash and injury. Always the instrument panel indicators and multi-
make sure the floor mat does not interfere
information display for any possible prob-
with the accelerator or brake pedal.
lem.
 Always use the retaining clip on the
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
 Similarly, the front passenger seat should
mat. also be moved as far back as possible.
 Always install the mat with the correct  Make sure that infants and small children
side facing down. Vehicle preparation before are properly restrained in accordance with
 Never install a second mat over or under all laws and regulations.
an existing floor mat.
driving
N00629001770
 Do not use a floor mat designed for
For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always
Defrosters
another model vehicle even if it is a
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine floor mat. check for the following:
 Before driving, be sure to check the fol- Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
lowing: and set the blower switch on high. You should
• Periodically check that the floor mat is be able to feel the air blowing against the
properly secured with the retaining clips. windshield.
If you remove the floor mat while clean- Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
ing the inside of your vehicle or for any shield, door windows)” on page 7-6, 7-10,
other reason, always check the condition 7-17.
of the floor mat after it has been rein-
stalled.
Driving safety 6-3

Safe driving techniques

to find out why immediately and have it
Tires fixed. Driving during cold weather
N00629400474
Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or  Check the battery. At the same time,
uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, Safe driving techniques check the terminals and wiring. During
glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look N00629200137 extremely cold weather, the battery will
for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and not be as strong. Also, the battery power
the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you level may drop because more power is
(including spare tire) for proper pressure. can avoid an accident or injury. However, if used for cold starting and driving.
Replace your tires before they are heavily Before driving the vehicle, check to see if
6 worn out.
you give extra attention to the following
areas, you can better protect yourself and the engine runs at the proper speed and if
On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure your passengers: the headlights are as bright as normally.
monitoring system, there is a risk of damage Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
to the tire inflation pressure sensors when the  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, During extreme cold weather, it is possi-
tire is replaced on the rim. Tire replacement road and weather conditions. Leave plenty ble that a very low battery could freeze.
should, only be performed by an authorized of stopping distance between your vehicle
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. and the vehicle ahead. WARNING
 Before changing lanes, check your mir-  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
rors, your blind spots, and use your turn- gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-
Lights signal light. tery to explode, which could cause serious
 While driving, watch the behavior of injury or death.
Have someone watch while you turn all the other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians. Always wear protective clothes and a face
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn  Always obey applicable laws and regula- mask when working with your battery, or
signal indicators and high-beam indicators on let a skilled mechanic do it.
tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always
the instrument panel. leave room for unexpected events, such as
sudden braking.  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
 If you plan to drive in another country, ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
Fluid leaks time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then
obey their vehicle registration laws and
make sure you will be able to get the right drive your vehicle slowly.
Check the ground under the vehicle after fuel.  Stay at low speeds at first so that the man-
parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or ual transaxle oil or the automatic transaxle
other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are fluid has time to spread to all the lubrica-
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need tion points.
6-4 Driving safety

Braking
 Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
cold weather conditions. This is normal they work normally. Parking
and shifting will get easier as the transaxle A film of water can be formed on the brake N00629601372
warms up. discs or brake drums, and prevent normal

 Check the engine antifreeze. braking after driving in heavy rain or through Parking on a hill
If there is not enough coolant because of a large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed.
leak or from engine overheating, add If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long slowly while lightly depressing the brake and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
Life Coolant Premium or equivalent. pedal. downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
Please read this section in conjunction If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels. 6
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.
When driving in cold weather
WARNING For vehicles equipped with man-
 Never open the radiator cap when the On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking ual transaxle
radiator is hot. You could be seriously system, making the brakes less effective.
burned. While driving in such conditions, pay close Place the gearshift lever into the “R”
attention to surrounding vehicles and to the (Reverse) position when parking on a down-
condition of the road surface. From time to hill slope, into the 1st position when parking
time, lightly depress the brake pedal and
Braking check how effective the brakes are.
on an uphill slope.
N00629500521
All parts of the brake system are critical to For vehicles equipped with contin-
safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an autho- When driving downhill uously variable transmission
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair (CVT)
facility of your choice at regular intervals It is important to take advantage of the engine
according to the “WARRANTY AND braking by downshifting while driving on
Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. steep downhill roads in order to prevent the
when parked and that the selector lever is in
brakes from overheating.
the “P” (PARK) position.
When brakes are wet When parking on a hill, it is important to set
the parking brake before moving the selector
Check the brake system while driving at a lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
low speed immediately after starting, espe- vents loading the parking brake against the
Driving safety 6-5

Loading information
transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to ard located on the driver’s door sill of your
move the selector lever out of the “P”
WARNING vehicle will show how much weight it may
 Do not park your vehicle in areas where
(PARK) position. properly carry.
combustible materials such as dry grass or
leaves can come in contact with a hot
Parking with the engine run- exhaust, since a fire could occur. WARNING
ning  Never overload your vehicle. Overloading
can damage your vehicle, adversely affect
Never leave the engine running while you

Do not keep the steering wheel vehicle performance, including handling
and braking, cause tire failure, and result
6 take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the fully turned for a long time in an accident.
engine running in a closed or poorly venti-
lated place. More effort could be required to turn the It is important to familiarize yourself with the
steering wheel. following terms before loading your vehicle:
WARNING Refer to “Electric power steering system
 Leaving the engine running risks injury or (EPS)” on page 5-50.  Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load
death from accidentally moving the gear- on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of the
shift lever (manual transaxle) or the selec- When leaving the vehicle
tor lever (CVT) or from the accumulation maximum loaded vehicle weight and
of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger dividing by two.
compartment. Always carry the key and lock all doors when  Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an
leaving the vehicle unattended. individual tire that is determined by dis-
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit tributing to each axle its share of the curb
Where you park area. weight, accessory weight, and normal
occupant weight and dividing by two.
Your front bumper can be damaged if you Loading information  Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. N00629900424
of -
Be careful when traveling up or down steep (a) Curb weight;
It is very important to know how much
slopes where your bumper can scrape the (b) Accessory weight;
weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is
road. (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and
called the vehicle capacity weight and
(d) Production options weight.
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo,
non-factory-installed options, if any, being
towed. The tire and loading information plac-
6-6 Driving safety

Loading information
 Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi- *: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-
cle with standard equipment including the son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool- regulations.
ant.
 Accessory weight: the combined weight
(in excess of those standard items which
may be replaced) of automatic transmis- Tire and loading information
sion, power steering, power brakes, power placard
windows, power seats, radio, and heater, N00630100396
to the extent that these items are available The tire and loading information placard is 6
as factory- installed equipment (whether located on the inside sill of the driver’s door.
installed or not).
 Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)*
times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity.
 Production options weight: the combined
weight of those installed regular produc-
tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
in excess of those standard items which
they replace, not previously considered in
curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. This placard shows the maximum number of
 Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)* occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
times the number of specified occupants. well as “the combined weight of occupants
(In your vehicle the number is 3) and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle
 Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu- capacity weight. This placard also tells you
tion within the passenger compartment (In the size and recommended inflation pressure
your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, for the original equipment tires on your vehi-
1 in second row seat) cle. For more information, refer to “Tires” on
page 9-12.
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
Load Limit
N00630201277
on the vehicle. That weight may
1. Locate the statement “The com- not safely exceed the available
bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
6 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
NOTE
4. The resulting figure equals the
 The above steps for determining
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam- correct load limit were written in
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals accordance with U.S.A. regula-
1400 lbs. and there will be five tions.
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi- Your vehicle cannot tow a
cle, the amount of available cargo trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650
lbs.)
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size
of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information
on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of this manual.
Driving safety 6-9

Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING WARNING

N00629700435  To reduce the risk of serious injury or  Make sure that the weight of luggage and
death, the combined weights of the driver, the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
passengers and cargo and must never mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load is exceeded, this could
N00630300082
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
To determine the cargo load capacity for your adversely affect vehicle performance, accident.
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may  The total weight of all occupants and lug-
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident. gage, including your roof load, must not
6 For additional information, if needed, refer to  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to “Tire and load-
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move when your ing information placard” on page 11-3.
on page 6-8.
vehicle is in motion.  Roof load is determined by adding the
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Having either the rear view blocked, or weight of the roof carrier and the weight
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers your cargo being thrown inside the cabin of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
listed on the safety certification label (A) if you suddenly have to brake can cause a
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door serious accident or injury or death.
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of CAUTION
weight. your vehicle. Try to spread the weight  Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
evenly. Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
vehicle.
For installation, refer to the instruction man-
Loading cargo on the roof ual provided with the roof carrier.
N00630401149  Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
WARNING items on the bottom. Do not load items that
are wider than the roof carrier.
 Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle
will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity
and adversely affect its handling charac-
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
6-10 Driving safety

Trailer towing
CAUTION Trailer towing

 Before driving and after traveling a short dis- N00629801358
tance, always check the load to make sure it
is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that
the load remains secure. If the load is not
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-
ate a road hazard.
6
NOTE
 To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in
use.
 Before using an automatic car wash, check WARNING
with the attendant to determine if the roof  Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
carrier should be removed. It may not be possible to maintain control
 Be sure that adequate clearance is main- or adequate braking.
tained for raising the trunk lid during loading
luggage on the roof carrier.
Driving safety 6-11

Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) ...............7-4
Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) .........................................7-7
Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)...................................7-12
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-18
Air purifier (if so equipped)............................................................7-19
Antenna ..........................................................................................7-19
7
General information about your radio ...........................................7-20
Vents
Vents
N00729901305
1- Open
7 2- Close
Side vents
1- Center vents
2- Side vents
When the dimple (A) is pressed, the vents NOTE
open.  On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
To close the vents, press the dimple on the air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
Air flow and direction adjust- opposite side.
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
ments indicate a problem.
Change the direction of the air flow by turn-
 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
N00730200330 ing the vent itself. vents as they could prevent the air condition-
ing from operating normally.
Center vents
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments. Changing the mode selection
N00736401676
To change air flow direction, turn the mode

selection dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial”
on page 7-5, 7-8.
On vehicles with the automatic air condition-
ing, press the MODE switch or defogger
switch. (Refer to “MODE switch” on page
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
7-14, “Defogger switch” on page 7-14.)
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen- 7

ger compartment. NOTE
 With the mode selection dial between the Foot/Defroster position
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
to the upper part of the passenger compart- Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and
ment. With the mode selection dial between the door windows.
the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows
mainly to the leg area.
Foot position
Air flows mainly to the leg area.
Foot/Face position
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger

compartment, and flows to the leg area.
Comfort controls 7-3

Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped)

3- Electric rear window defogger switch
NOTE Heater without air condi-  P. 5-83
 With the mode selection dial between the
tioning function (if so equipped) 4- Mode selection dial
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly 5- Air selection lever
N00737701054
to the leg area. With the mode selection dial
between the “ ”and “ ” positions, air The heater can only be used while the engine
flows mainly to the windshield and the door is running.
Blower speed selection dial
windows. N00737901043
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

CAUTION tion, select the blower speed by turning the
 The engine speed may increase when the air
Defroster position conditioning is operating.
blower speed selection dial.
7 With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehi-
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the cle will creep to a greater degree than with a
door windows. lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.
Control panel
N00737801042
1- Temperature control dial

2- Blower speed selection dial

Temperature control dial Mode selection dial

N00738001067 N00738101084
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise To change air flow direction, turn the mode
to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock- selection dial. Refer to “Changing the mode
wise to make the air cooler. selection” on page 7-2.
7
If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, use the recirculation position.
Switch to the outside air position every now
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.
Air selection lever CAUTION

N00738201056  Using recirculated air for a long time may
Normally, use the outside air position to keep cause the windows to fog up.
the windshield and side windows clear and to
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield.
To change the air selection, use the air selec-

tion lever.
“ ” Outside air
“ ” Recirculated air

Operating the system Combination of unheated air and Defrosting or defogging (wind-
N00738301099 heated air shield, door windows)
N00738401045 N00738501091
Heating Set the mode selection dial to the positions

shown in the illustration and set the air selec- CAUTION
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position lever to the outside air position.  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
tion and set the air selection lever to the out- through all the windows.
side air position. The air flow will be directed to the leg area
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise and the upper part of the passenger compart-
Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera- ment. Set the desired blower speed.
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the
7 ture. Select the desired blower speed to fit
your needs. or slightly warm air (depending upon the windshield and door window.
position of the temperature control dial) flows For ordinary defrosting
to the upper part of the passenger compart- Use this setting to keep the windshield and
ment. door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
snow).
NOTE
 For quick heating, set the blower speed at the
3rd position.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”

position.

Manual air conditioning (if so equipped)

2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air 4- Electric rear window defogger
position. Manual air conditioning (if so switch P.5-83
3. Select your desired blower speed by turn- equipped) 5- Mode selection dial
ing the blower speed selection dial. N00730301400 6- Air selection lever
4. Select your desired temperature by turn-
ing the temperature control dial. The air conditioning can only be used while
the engine is running.
Blower speed selection dial
N00736501228
For quick defrosting
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
CAUTION tion, select the blower speed by turning the
 The engine speed may increase when the air
blower speed selection dial.
conditioning is operating.
With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehi-
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
7
cle will creep to a greater degree than with a
lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.
Control panel
N00730501327

position.
2. Set the air selection lever to the outside air
position.
3. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
4. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.
NOTE
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows. 1- Temperature control dial
2- Air conditioning switch
3- Blower speed selection dial

Temperature control dial Mode selection dial Air selection lever

N00736601258 N00736701246 N00736801423
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise To change air flow direction, turn the mode Normally, use the outside air position to keep
to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock- selection dial. Refer to “Changing the mode the windshield and side windows clear and to
wise to make the air cooler. selection” on page 7-2. quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield.
To change the air selection, use the air selec-

tion lever.
“ ” Outside air
7 “ ” Recirculated air
NOTE
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial.
If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
Switch to the outside air position every now
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.

CAUTION Operating the air conditioning Cooling

 Using recirculated air for a long time may system N00731201406
cause the windows to fog up. N00731101304
Heating
Air conditioning switch
N00731001488
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-
Push the switch, and the air conditioning tion and set the air selection lever to the out-
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning side air position.
indicator light (A) will come on. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
or counterclockwise to the desired tempera- 7
ture. Select the desired blower speed to fit
your needs.
position.
position.
3. Push the air conditioning switch.
4. Change the temperature by turning the
control dial clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
Push the switch again and the air condition- 5. Set the desired blower speed.
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
light (A) goes off. NOTE
 If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
NOTE some way, set the air selection lever to the
recirculation position. Let in some outside
 For quick heating, set the blower speed at the
air from time to time for good ventilation.
3rd position.
 To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection
dial to the “ ” position.


Combination of unheated air and Defrosting or defogging (wind-
position.
heated air shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
N00731301292 N00731401596
ing the blower speed selection dial.
Set the mode selection dial to the positions
4. Select your desired temperature by turn-
shown in the illustration and set the air selec- CAUTION
ing the temperature control dial.
tion lever to the outside air position.  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.
The air flow will be directed to the leg area
For quick defrosting
and the upper part of the passenger compart-
Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”
ment. Set the desired blower speed.
Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the
7 or slightly warm air (depending upon the windshield and door window.
position of the temperature control dial) flows For ordinary defrosting
to the upper part of the passenger compart- Use this setting to keep the windshield and
ment. door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
snow).

position.
position.
3. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
4. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” NOTE

position.  To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.

NOTE
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
control dial near the maximum cool position.
This would blow cool air on the window
glass and fog it up.

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

N00731501438
The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.
CAUTION
 The engine speed may increase when the air conditioning is operating.
With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the
vehicle from creeping.
7
Control panel
N00711801624
Type 1
Type 2
1- Temperature control switch 4- Air selection switch 7- AUTO switch

2- Air conditioning switch 5- Blower speed selection switch 8- Electric rear window defogger switch
3- MODE switch 6- Defogger switch  P.5-83


9- OFF switch The selected blower speed will be shown in
Temperature control switch
10- Temperature display the display (A).
N00737001406
11- Mode selection display
Press or of the temperature control
12- Air selection indicator
switch to the desired temperature.
13- Air conditioning indicator
The selected temperature will be shown in the
14- AUTO indicator
display (A).
15- Blower speed display
NOTE
 There is an interior air temperature sensor
(A) in the illustrated position.
Never place anything over the sensor, since 7
doing so will prevent it from functioning
properly. 1- Increase
2- Decrease
NOTE
 The temperature value of air conditioning is
switched in conjunction with outside temper-
 A sound will be made every time you push ature display unit of the multi information
any of the switches. display.
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on
page 5-73.
Blower speed selection switch
N00736900179
Press of the blower speed selection

switch to increase the blower speed.
Press of the blower speed selection
switch to decrease the blower speed.

page7-16. light (A) will come on. The selected mode is
NOTE Refer to “Personalizing the air selection shown in the display (B). Refer to “Changing
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
(Changing the function setting)” on the mode selection” on page 7-2.
the temperature of the air from the heater
page7-15.
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
switch. MODE switch
To prevent the windshield and windows from N00737101247
fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to
To change air flow direction, press the
“ ” and the blower speed will be reduced.
MODE switch. Each time the MODE switch
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
is pressed, the mode changes to the next one
in the following sequence: “ ”  “ ” 
7 tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows. “ ”  “ ”  “ ”. The selected mode
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set is shown in the display (A). Refer to “Chang-
to the highest setting) ing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioning will stop. NOTE
If the air selection and the air conditioning  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
are operated manually after an automatic conditioning system automatically operates
changeover, manual operation will be and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
selected. air) is selected.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
to the lowest setting) shield, door windows)” on page 7-17.
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate.
The above indicates the factory settings. You

Air selection switch
N00737200368
can personalize the air selection switch and
air conditioning switch to match your per- Normally, use the outside air position to keep
sonal preferences. the windshield and side windows clear and to
Defogger switch quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a N00703400015
repair facility of your choice for assistance. shield.
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning When this switch is pressed, the mode
switch (Changing the function setting)” on changes to the “ ” mode. The indicator


To change the air selection, simply press the and then to keep the windows from fogging Press the air selection switch for about 10
air selection switch. up. seconds or longer.
The selected position will be shown in the When the setting has changed, the system
display (A). CAUTION will beep and the “ ” indicator will
 Using recirculated air for a long time may flash.
 Outside air: “ ” indicator is ON cause the windows to fog up. • When the setting has changed from
Outside air is introduced into the passen- enabled to disabled,
ger compartment. the system will beep three times and the
 Recirculated air: “ ” indicator is ON NOTE indicator will flash three times.
Air is recirculated inside the passenger  If you press the AUTO switch to select auto- • When the setting has changed from dis-
compartment. matic control after manual operation, the air abled to enabled,
selection switch will also be automatically the system will beep two times and the 7
controlled. indicator will flash three times.
Personalizing the air selection NOTE

 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
(Changing the function setting) control”.
N00760000089
 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
You can change the following functions to selection will automatically change to the
match your preference. outside air position, even if the system is set
to “Disable automatic air control”, in order
 Enable automatic air control: to prevent windows from fogging up.
When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air
When the air conditioning turns on, the air selection switch will also be automatically
selection is controlled automatically. When controlled.
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection
automatically goes back to the outside air  Disable automatic air control:
position. Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,
If high cooling performance is desired, or if the air selection switch will not be auto-
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in matically controlled.
Switch to the outside air position every now  Changing the settings


When the AUTO switch is pressed, or
Air conditioning switch NOTE
when the temperature control switch has
N00737301409  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
Push the switch, and the air conditioning been set to the minimum temperature, the
conditioning will run automatically, even if
air conditioning switch is automatically
compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator the system is set to “Disable automatic air
controlled. conditioning control”, in order to prevent
will be shown in the display (A).
windows from fogging up.
 Disable automatic air conditioning con-
trol:
The air conditioning switch is not auto- AUTO switch
matically controlled, unless the air condi- N00703500016
tioning switch is used. When the AUTO switch is pressed, the mode
7  Changing the settings
selection, blower speed adjustment, recircu-
lated/outside air selection, temperature
Press the air conditioning switch for about adjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF sta-
10 seconds or longer. tus are all controlled automatically.
When the setting has changed, the system The “AUTO” indicator will be shown in the
will beep and the “ ” indicator will display (A).
Push the switch again and the air condition- flash.
ing compressor will stop and the indicator • When the setting has changed from
goes off. enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the
indicator will flash three times.
Personalizing the air conditioning • When the setting has changed from dis-
switch (Changing the function set- abled to enabled,
ting) the system will beep two times and the
N00759800090 indicator will flash three times.
You can change the following functions to
match your preference. NOTE
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
 Enable automatic air conditioning control: conditioning control”.


In normal conditions, use the system in the
OFF switch Defrosting or defogging (wind-
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
N00703600017 shield, door windows)
Push the switch to turn off the air condition- 1. Push the AUTO switch. N00732401522
ing system. 2. Set the temperature control switch to the

desired temperature. The temperature can CAUTION
be set within a range of around 61 to 89  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.
(Type 1) or 17 to 31 (Type 2).
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower To remove frost or mist from the windshield
speed, temperature adjustment and ON/OFF and door windows, use the MODE switch or
of air conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically.
defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”). 7
For ordinary defrosting
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
NOTE door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
 Set the temperature at about 75 (Type 1) or
24 (Type 2) under normal conditions.
snow).
Operating the air conditioning
system (automatic mode) Operating the air conditioning
N00731701544 system (manual mode)
N00731801167
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection switch and the MODE switch to the
desired positions. To return to automatic
operation, press the AUTO switch.
1. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi-

tion.

Important air conditioning operating tips

2. Set the air selection switch to the outside 3. When running the air conditioning, make
air position.
NOTE sure the air intake, which is located in
3. Select your desired blower speed by  If the mode selection is set “ ” position, front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
you cannot turn the air conditioning off or
pressing the blower speed selection tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
select the recirculation position. This pre-
switch. the air-intake chamber may reduce air
vents the windows from fogging up.
4. Select your desired temperature by press- flow and plug the water drains.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
ing the temperature control switch. side vents toward the door windows.
5. Push the air conditioning switch.  When defrosting, do not set the temperature Air conditioning system refrig-
to the maximum cool position. This will
For quick defrosting blow cool air on the window glass and fog it
erant and lubricant recommen-
up. dations
7
Important air conditioning If the air conditioning seems less effective
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
operating tips leak.
N00733700336
Have the system inspected by your authorized
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the of your choice.
vehicle interior extremely hot which then
requires more time to cool. If it is neces-
sary to park in the sun, open the windows
1. Push the defogger switch to change to the for the first few minutes of air condition-
“ ” position. ing to expel the hot air.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- when the air conditioning is in use. The
tion. entry of outside air through open windows
will reduce cooling efficiency.
NOTE
 While the mode selection is set “ ” posi-
tion, the air conditioning compressor will run
automatically. The outside air position will
also be selected automatically.

Air purifier (if so equipped)
CAUTION Air purifier (if so equipped) Antenna

 The air conditioning system in your vehicle N00733800180 N00734201553
must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-
134a and the lubricant ZXL 200PG. The air conditioning system is equipped with
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will an air filter to remove pollen and dust.
To remove
cause severe damage and may require replac- The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and
ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise.
dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace
system. it periodically. For the maintenance interval,
The release of refrigerant into the atmo-
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
sphere is not recommended.
The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi-
NANCE MANUAL”.
cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozone 7
layer. However, it may contribute slightly to NOTE
global warming.  Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
It is recommended that the old refrigerant be ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
saved and recycled for future use. air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-
vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
air flow is lower than normal or when the
During a long period of disuse windshield or windows start to fog up easily,
replace the air filter.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
The air conditioning should be operated for at repair facility of your choice for assistance. To install
least five minutes each week, even in cold
weather. This includes the quick defrosting Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base
mode. Operating the air condition system (B) until it is securely retained.
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning
in the best operating condition.
NOTE
 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the
following cases:
• When using an automatic car wash
• When covering your vehicle with a car
cover

General information about your radio
NOTE Signal transmission Reflection

• When driving into a structure that has a low
ceiling FM signals do not follow the earth surface The reason why one can hear FM but not AM
nor are they reflected by the upper atmo- in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected
General information about be received over long distances. AM signals by solid objects such as buildings, etc.
your radio follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by Because FM signals are easily reflected by
N00733901540 the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and broadcasts can be received over longer disturbances.
FM stations. tances. The direct signal from the broadcast station
reaches the antenna slightly before the
7 The quality of your reception is affected by
reflected signal. This time difference may
distance, obstacles, and signal interference. FM AM
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
 The device may not cause harmful inter-

25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius
ference. (40 to 64 km) (160 km)
recieved, including interference that may
cause undesirable operation.
Weak reception (fading)
CAUTION
 Changes or modifications not expressly Because of the limited range of FM signals
approved by the party meeting the above and the way FM waves transmit, you may
conditions could void the user’s authority to experience weak or fading FM reception.
operate the equipment. When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
turbed.

General information about your radio
Cross modulation Causes of disturbances

If one listens to a weak station and is in the FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
vicinity of another strong station, both sta- tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
tions might be received simultaneously. those without an electronic noise suppression
device. The disturbance is even greater if the
station is weak or poorly tuned.
FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tive to electrical disturbances such as power
lines, lightning and other types of similar
electrical phenomena. 7
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-12
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-13
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-15 8
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down Jump-starting the engine CAUTION

N00836300233 N00836401837  Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, If the engine cannot be started because the
both systems can be damaged.
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the battery from another vehicle using jumper
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane cables. 3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.
slowly with the hazard lights flashing until Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the cle. Put an automatic transaxle or CVT in
WARNING “P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N”
flashers flashing.  To reduce the risk of igniting flammable (Neutral).
gas that may be emitted from the battery,
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
If the engine stops/fails carefully read this section before jump-
position or put the operation mode in
starting the vehicle.
8  Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing
OFF.
If the engine stops, there will be no power or towing. This can cause an accident
assist to the steering and brakes, making these resulting in serious injury or death and NOTE
difficult to use. can damage the vehicle.  Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
 The brake booster will not work, so the both batteries.
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal NOTE
will be harder to press than usual.  Do not use jumper cables if they have dam- 5. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at
 Since there is no power steering assist, the age or corrosion. the proper level. (Refer to “Battery” on
steering wheel will be hard to turn. page 9-11.)
1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
When the engine fails at the bands or bracelets that might create an WARNING
intersection accidental electrical contact.  If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or
2. Position the vehicles close enough looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP
together so that the jumper cables can STARTING!!
Get help from your passengers, bystanders, The battery might split open or explode if
reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe the temperature is below the freezing
touching each other.
area. point or if it is not filled to the proper
level.
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine

6. Connect one end of one jumper cable 8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
NOTE the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
to the positive (+) terminal of the dis-
 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
charged battery (A), and then connect the utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
size.
other end to the positive (+) terminal with the discharged battery.
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could
of the booster battery (B). result. 9. After the engine is started, disconnect the
cables in the reverse order from the way
7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable you connected them.
to the negative (-) terminal of the
booster battery (B), and then connect the Charging the battery by using
other end to the designated ground
location of the vehicle with the discharged
an external battery charger
battery (A) at the point farthest from the
battery. WARNING 8
 Always remove the battery from your
WARNING vehicle when the battery is charged by an
 Be sure to follow the proper order when external battery charger.
connecting the batteries, of:  Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
WARNING    from the battery because the battery could
 Make sure that the jumper cables and  Make sure that the connection is made explode.
your clothing are clear of the cooling fans to the correct designated location (as  Keep your work area well vented when
and drive belts. Entanglement with the shown in the illustration) properly. If the charging or using the battery in an
fans or belts can cause serious personal connection is directly made to the negative enclosed space.
injury. (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable  Remove all the caps before charging the
gases from inside the battery might catch battery.
fire and explode, causing personal injury.  Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
NOTE  When connecting the jumper cable, do not sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte
 Open the terminal cover before connecting connect the positive (+) cable to the nega- comes in contact with your hands, eyes,
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat- clothes, or the painted surface of your
the battery. tery explode. vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If
(Refer to “Battery: Disconnection and con- electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
nection” on page 9-11.) immediately and thoroughly with water,
and get prompt medical attention.
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If 6. When you do not see any more steam or
WARNING the fan is not turning, stop the engine spray, open the hood. Look for obvious
 Always wear protective clothing and gog-
immediately and contact an authorized leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
gles when working near the battery.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- careful as components will be hot. Any
 Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-
ity of your choice for assistance. leak source must be repaired.
dren.
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check
WARNING the coolant level in the engine coolant res-
As your vehicle has anti-lock  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair, ervoir. If there is none, or if it is too low,
brakes jewelry and clothes away from the cooling slowly add coolant.
fan. The cooling fan can start at any time. 8. If the engine coolant reservoir needs cool-
ant, you will probably also need to add
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery
4. If you see steam or spray coming from coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen or
charge after the engine has been started by
under the hood, turn off the engine. remove the radiator cap until the engine
8 using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.
This can cause the anti-lock braking system 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming has cooled down.
warning light to blink on and off. This is only from under the hood, leave the engine on
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a until the high coolant temperature warn- WARNING
problem with the brake system. If this hap- ing light goes off. After the high coolant  Removing the radiator cap could scald
temperature warning light has gone off, you with escaping hot water or steam.
pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the
you can start driving again. If the high When checking the radiator level, cover
charging system is operating properly. the cap with a cloth before trying to
coolant temperature warning light stays
remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
on, turn off the engine.
Engine overheating wise, without pressing down, to the first
notch. The pressure in the system will then
N00836501418 WARNING be let out. When the pressure is COM-
If the high coolant temperature warning light  Before raising the engine hood, check to PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
illuminates while the engine is running, the see if there is steam or spray coming from keep turning the cap counterclockwise
engine may be overheating. If this happens: under the hood. Steam or spray coming until it comes off.
from an overheated engine could seriously
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on scald you.
Do not open the hood until there is no 9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant,
the hazard warning flashers. up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use
steam or spray.
2. With the engine still running, carefully plain water if you have to (and replace it
raise the engine hood to vent the engine with the right coolant as soon as possible).
compartment.
8-4 For emergencies

Jack and tools

10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it
fully. Check the coolant temperature Jack and tools Tools
warning light. You can start driving again N00836601422
when the high coolant temperature warn-

ing light does not come on. Storage
11. Have the system inspected by your autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair The tools are stored beneath the floor board
facility of your choice. of the cargo area. The jack is stored under the
driver’s seat.
1- Tools bag 8
2- Wheel nut wrench
3- Jack bar
4- Towing hook
Jack
Move the driver’s seat fully forward to access

the jack from the rear seat area.
(Refer to “Front seat” on page 4-3.)
1- Tools
2- Jack
CAUTION
 Never access, remove or store the jack from
the front of the driver’s seat. Doing so could
damage electrical wires under the driver’s
seat.
For emergencies 8-5

How to change a tire

On vehicles equipped with continuously
To remove WARNING variable transmission (CVT), move the
 After storing the jack in place, make sure
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
Turn the shaft end of the jack in the direction the jack is securely fixed in the holder.
and stop the engine.
(1) until the jack fully retracts and remove the If the jack is not fixed securely, it may
move and hit an occupant in an accident 4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
jack from the holder (A). warning triangle, flashing signal light,
resulting in serious injury or death. Also
the jack may move forward during driv- etc., at an adequate distance from the
To store ing and could interfere with driver’s pedal vehicle, and have all your passengers exit
operation causing an accident. the vehicle.
Put the jack in the holder (A) and turn the 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
shaft end of the jack in the direction (2) by it is raised on the jack, place chocks or
hand until the jack is firmly secured.
How to change a tire blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally
opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
8 N00836901887
ing.
WARNING
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
 Never get under the vehicle or put any
portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.
Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly. WARNING
3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-  Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
axle, stop the engine and move the gear- correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If
shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position. the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
jack could slip out of position, leading to
an accident.
8-6 For emergencies

NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

 The chocks shown in the illustration do not  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the  Because the compact spare tire is designed
come with your vehicle. It is recommended inflation pressure should be checked at least only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep once a month to assure that it remains at the other vehicle.
them in the vehicle for use if needed. recommended inflation pressure. See the tire  Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use and loading information placard attached to ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
stones or any other objects that are large the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load- snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
enough to hold the wheel in position. ing information placard” on page 11-3. compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can damage these parts or other parts on your
cause an accident. If you have no choice but vehicle.
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep  Do not use tire chains with your compact
ready. your speed down and avoid sudden steering spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage
(Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.) or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to 8
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.
Spare tire information  The compact spare tire should be used only To remove compact spare tire
N00849600344
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is N00849701371
being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys- 1. Lift up the floor board of the cargo area.
Compact spare tire tem will not function properly. Have the tire 2. To remove the compact spare tire, remove
replaced or repaired at an authorized the installation clamp (A) by turning it
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility counterclockwise.
The compact spare tire is stowed beneath the
of your choice as soon as possible.
floor board of the cargo area. It is designed to
 Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
save space in the cargo area. Its lighter weight ing with the compact spare tire.
makes it easier to use if a flat tire occurs.  Avoid sudden starting and braking when
driving with the compact spare tire.
WARNING  Do not drive through automatic car washes
 Tires, including spare tire, degrade over and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
time with age even when they are not age the underside of your vehicle. Because
being used. It is recommended that tires the compact spare tire is smaller than the
over 6 years generally be replaced even if original tire, there is less clearance between
damage is not obvious. the ground and your vehicle.
For emergencies 8-7


2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
NOTE points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
NOTE
 The flat tire with a normal size wheel cannot  Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
the jacking point closest to the tire you
be stored beneath the floor board. Store the near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack
wish to change.
flat tire in the cargo area. slips out of position.
To change a tire
N00849801529
1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first

remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-
ers” on page 8-11). Then, loosen the
wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do
8 not remove the wheel nuts yet.
WARNING
 Set the jack only at the positions shown 3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
it could dent your vehicle or the jack of the jack.
might fall over and cause personal injury.
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
under the jack base.
8-8 For emergencies


4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut
wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar
WARNING WARNING
 No one should be in your vehicle when  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the
using the jack. (I) facing outward. If you cannot see the
illustration.
 Do not start or run the engine while your valve stem (I), you have installed the
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until wheel backwards.
vehicle is on the jack.
the tire is raised slightly off the ground Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires
surface. that are still on the ground could turn and installed backwards can cause vehicle
make your vehicle fall off the jack. damage and result in an accident.
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut

wrench, then take the wheel off.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing 8
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-

face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
WARNING tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the mount the spare tire.
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
For emergencies 8-9


7. Install the wheel nuts with their tapered 9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the 11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand illustration until each nut has been tight- ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
until the wheel is no longer loose. ened to the torque listed here. is listed on the tire and loading informa-
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m) tion placard attached to the driver’s door
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to
Steel wheel
Aluminum wheel
8
CAUTION
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or CAUTION
the nuts or they will tighten too much.  Never use your foot or a pipe extension to
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench CAUTION
8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so,  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and cause an accident. If you have no choice but
touches the ground, by rotating the wheel
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
nut wrench counterclockwise.
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it. or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
come loose.
8-10 For emergencies

CAUTION Wheel cover (if so equipped) CAUTION

 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving N00849401248  Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
after changing the tire, have the tire checked your bare hands can seriously injure your
for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi To remove fingers.
choice. Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or into the notch provided in the wheel cover, To install
use a different size from the one listed. This and pry the cover away from the wheel.
would cause early wear and poor handling.
Using the same procedure at the other wheel
cover notches, work the wheel cover away CAUTION
To store the flat tire or spare from the wheel to remove it completely.  Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
tire, jack, bar and wheel nut back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
wrench ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from 8
N00850001198 coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that
has broken tabs.
Store the flat tire in the cargo area.
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
ing the spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut
wrench.
Refer to “To remove compact spare tire” on
page 8-7 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.
NOTE
 The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
ful when prying it off.
For emergencies 8-11

Towing
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel 4. Gently tap around the circumference of
cover notch (D). the wheel cover at the top (H), then push
CAUTION
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
the wheel cover into place.
cle with a rope.
NOTE
 Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing.
These hooks are provided only for the pur-
pose of transporting the vehicle itself.
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.
There may be local regulations concerning

8 towing in your area.
NOTE Obey the regulations of the area where you
 Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) are driving your vehicle.
provided on the reverse side to show the air
Towing
N00837001960
valve location.
Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the opening with the If your vehicle needs to be
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air
valve.
towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to

2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
into the wheel.
vice.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cover and hold them in place with both cle using a tow truck.
knees.
Incorrect towing equipment could damage
your vehicle.

Operation under adverse driving conditions
CAUTION Towing with rear wheels off the

 Do not tow continuously variable transmis- ground (Type B - M/T vehicles
sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels only)
on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the
vehicle is towed like this, the continuously
Towing with rear wheels off the ground. variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not Set the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
Do not tow CVT vehicles with this style. reach all parts of the transmission, thus dam- position.
aging it. Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E position with a rope or tie-down strap.
equipment.
 If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or
Towing with front wheels off the ground.
damaged, transport the vehicle with the driv-
Towing with front wheels off the
ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as ground (Type C)
illustrated. 8
 If the vehicle is towed with the ignition Release the parking brake.
switch in the “ON” position or the operation Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
mode in ON and only the front wheels or
position (manual transaxle) or the selector
only the rear wheels raised off the ground
lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
(Type B or C), the Active Stability Control
(ASC) may operate, resulting in an accident. (CVT).
When towing the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised, turn the ignition switch to the
“ACC” position or put the operation mode in
Operation under adverse
ACC. When towing the vehicle with the driving conditions
front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch N00837200750
Towing the vehicle by a tow or the operation mode as follows.
truck [Except for vehicles equipped with the
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” sand, mud or snow
CAUTION position.
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam- motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to
age the bumper and front end. free it.

Operation under adverse driving conditions

Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
CAUTION braking system (ABS). Hold the brake
 When driving in rain, a layer of water may
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
form between the tires and the road surface
the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the Do not pump the brake pedal which will
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip
transaxle before trying again. on the road, making it difficult to steer or result in reduced braking performance.
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock- brake properly. When driving on a wet road:  After parking on snowy or icy roads, it
ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck • Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. may be difficult to move your vehicle due
service. • Do not drive on worn tires. to the brake being frozen. Depress the
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla- accelerator pedal little by little to move
WARNING tion pressures. the vehicle when safe to do so.
 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
CAUTION
stuck position, make sure that there are no On snowy or icy roads  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
people nearby. The rocking motion can
8 make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward  When driving on a road covered with
The vehicle could start moving when it
or backward, and injure any bystanders. breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains an accident.
cannot be used on your vehicle. There
may be state or local regulations about
On wet roads using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using
On a bumpy or rutted road
them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-18
CAUTION and “Tire chains” on page 9-18.
 Drive as slow as possible when driving on
 Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes etc.
 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
by driving into flood water. CAUTION
brakes.
 When driving in rain, on water-covered
 Allow extra distance between your vehi-  Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
roads, or through a car wash, water could get
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and holes can damage the tires and wheels.
into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
avoid sudden braking. Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
brake pedal to see if they are working prop-  If a skid occurs when the accelerator
age.
erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly pedal is depressed, take your foot off the
 The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and
several times while driving to dry the brake pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:
pads or linings, then check them again. skid.

Fuel Pump Shut-off System
CAUTION
• driven over a step (for example, at the
entrance or exit of a parking lot);
• parked too closely against a curb or parking
block, or by the side of a road with curb-
stones;
• driven on a steep slope.
Fuel Pump Shut-off System

N00860600031
WARNING
 Before attempting to restart the engine 8
after a collision, always inspect the ground
under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel
leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do
not restart the engine.
 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer after any collision.
In the event of a collision causing frontal air-

bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
engine.

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-3
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-4
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8
Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ...............................................9-9
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) ...........................................................................9-9 9
Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-9
Brake fluid .....................................................................................9-10
Battery ............................................................................................9-11
Tires ...............................................................................................9-12
Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-18
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-19
Parking brake .................................................................................9-19
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-19
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-20
General maintenance .....................................................................9-21
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-22
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-22
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-22
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-26
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-32
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-32
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-33
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING

N00937301485  After performing the maintenance work,
make sure that no tools or cloths are left
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-
behind in the engine compartment.
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
sible. the vehicle may occur.
 The fan can turn on automatically even if
You can do some of the maintenance work
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- tion switch to the “OFF” position or put
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors the operation mode in OFF to be safe
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. while you work in the engine compart-
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- ment.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized  Do not smoke or allow open flames around
Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-
Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
of your choice. ble.
9 This section describes the maintenance  Be extremely careful when working
supplements your new vehicle warranties.
around the battery. It contains poisonous See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so
and corrosive sulfuric acid. for details.
desire. Follow the instructions and precau-
tions for each procedure.  Do not get under your vehicle while it is on
a jack.
Always use properly rated automotive
WARNING jack stands.
 When checking or servicing the inside of  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
the engine compartment, be sure the als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
engine is stopped and has had a chance to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
cool down. or a repair facility of your choice if you
 If you need to work in the engine compart- have questions.
ment with the engine running, be espe-
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts,
or other moving parts.
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

Catalytic converter
If your vehicle is raised with a WARNING WARNING

garage jack  Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-  Do not park or run your vehicle in areas
face. where combustible materials such as dry
Only use the designated positions shown in Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause grass or leaves can come in contact with a
the illustration. personal injury. Always use the jack on a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,  Do not put undercoat paint on the cata-
make sure there are no sand or pebbles lytic converter.
under the jack base.
Never use the rear To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-
suspensions as a jack- Catalytic converter verter damage:
ing point.
N00937400450
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of
The catalytic converter requires you to use the type of recommended in the “Fuel
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will selection”.
destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
the converter.
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel 9
level. Running out of gas could damage
Normally, the catalytic converter does not the catalytic converter.
require maintenance. However, it is important  Do not try to start the engine by pushing
to keep the engine properly tuned for the con- or towing the vehicle. If the battery is
verter to continue to work properly. weak or run down, use jumper cables to
*- Front of the vehicle properly start the engine.
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
WARNING if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
when performing diagnostic tests.
 Set a garage jack only at the position  Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
shown here. If the garage jack is set a is idling roughly or otherwise obviously
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,
wrong position, it could damage your malfunctioning.
have it serviced promptly. Running your
vehicle and/or your vehicle might fall vehicle when it is overheated may result in  To prevent the catalytic converter from
from the jack causing injury or death. damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not
race the engine when stopping the engine.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
 Stop driving the vehicle if you think the Pull the lever toward you to release the
performance is noticeably low, or the engine hood latch.
NOTE
 To prevent damage to the engine hood and
engine has a malfunction such as with the
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting
ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
position when you open the engine hood.
driving immediately, slow down and drive
for only a short time. Have your vehicle Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your under the hood marked with an arrow.
 In unusual situations involving major
engine problems, a burning odor may
indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
9 immediately take your vehicle to a dealer
WARNING
 Never use the release lever to unlatch the
or a repair facility of your choice for ser-
engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
vice.
 Do not drive your vehicle unless the
engine hood is locked.
Engine hood Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
N00937501647 CAUTION
 Always insert the support prop into the hole
To open specially made for it. Propping the engine
hood at any other place could cause the prop
to slip out and lead to an accident.
Use the engine hood release lever (located  The hood prop can fall out if the hood is
under the instrument panel near the driver’s lifted by a strong wind.
door) to unlock the engine hood.

View of the engine compartment
To close NOTE Engine oil and oil filter

 If this does not close the engine hood prop- N00937702011
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
put it back in its retainer. position.
 Do not push down strongly on the engine
To check and refill engine oil
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
you push down, you could create a dent in It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may
the vehicle body. need to add oil between the recommended oil
change intervals. Before starting the engine,
check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.
View of the engine compart- To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,
ment wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way.
N00937601781 Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and
check the oil level by checking the upper sur-
face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go
9
Slowly lower the engine hood approximately above the line on the dipstick.
8 inches (20 cm), then let it drop from its own
weight.
NOTE
 If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe
CAUTION off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers moment and then recheck the oil level by
when closing the engine hood. checking the upper surface of the dipstick.
 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
before driving. 1- Engine oil level dipstick If the level does not reach the line which
If you drive without the engine hood com-
2- Air cleaner filter shows the minimum amount of oil required,
pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
3- Battery remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve
ing.
4- Brake fluid cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.
5- Windshield washer fluid reservoir
6- Engine oil filler cap
7- Radiator cap
8- Engine coolant reservoir

Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
Good vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads, API service symbol
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark

CAUTION
 Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
oil pressure, which could damage the engine. Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only 1- The upper part indicates the quality of
9 engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym- the oil.
bol on the front of the container. 2- The center part indicates the SAE grade
WARNING of the oil viscosity.
 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam- ILSAC certification symbol
age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
contact may cause serious skin disorders, Recommended engine oil vis-
including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
cosity
oughly after working with it.
 Keep used oil out of the reach of children. Use engine oil with the proper thickness for
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving.
NOTE
 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
by payload, engine speed, etc. If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
fication symbol, use an API classification SN
or higher oil with the following label.

Engine coolant
require that the filter can withstand a pressure
of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi
To add coolant
oil filter is the best replacement filter.
Follow the installation instructions printed on Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
the filter. Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
Engine coolant nitrate and non-borate coolant with long
N00937801637
life hybrid organic acid technology
To check the coolant level

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic
The engine coolant reservoir (A) lets you excellent protection against corrosion and
Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
quickly see when you need to add coolant. rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
economy and cold weather starting.
When the engine is cold, the level of the cool- num, and prevents clogs in some parts of the
If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-
ant in the reservoir should be between the “F” engine. 9
thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
(FULL) and “L” (LOW) marks. The radiator If you need to add coolant often, or if the
grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
usually stays full so there is no reason to level in the reservoir does not drop when the
can be used.
remove the radiator cap (B) except when you engine cools, the cooling system should be
However, Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20
check the coolant freeze point or replace the pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehicle to
Synthetic Engine Oil should be used at the
antifreeze coolant. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
next oil change to maintain optimum fuel
repair facility of your choice for testing.
economy and cold weather starting.
CAUTION
To replace the oil filter  Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
FULL
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND parts.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. LOW
Only use high quality replacement filters on
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters

Air cleaner filter

 Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
CAUTION WARNING ator with the proper gauge, and only when
 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-  Wait for the engine to cool down before
it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
fers depending on the expected ambient tem- opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
tents of the reservoir must be protected
perature. steam or boiling coolant could spray up
Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration from the filler port and scald you. against freezing.
of anti-freeze  Keep the front of the radiator and con-
Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentration denser clean.
of anti-freeze  If the engine coolant temperature does not
You can check the concentration level with a rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
gauge from an automotive supply store, or your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
service station can check it for you. choice to have the thermostat checked,
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration and replaced if necessary.
of coolant.
 Do not top off the reservoir with plain water
9 only. Water by itself boils at a lower temper- Air cleaner filter
ature and does not stop rust or freezing. If the N00937901540
water freezes, it will damage your cooling
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
corrosion and rust. from use and not filter properly. Replace it
with a new filter using the schedule in the
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Radiator cap Points to remember MANUAL”.
The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre-  Do not overfill the reservoir.
vent losing coolant, which may result in  Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap
engine damage. Only use a Genuine that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow
Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved from the reservoir back to the radiator
equivalent. when the engine cools down. If you need
to change the cap, use the exact same
kind.

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)

1. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
cover and take out the air cleaner filter. Manual transaxle oil (if so correct level.
equipped)
N00938201218
Fluid type
Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is
checked, add oil to maintain the proper level, Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
if necessary. CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-
Refill or change with the oil according to the mum transmission performance.
table below.
CAUTION
Oil type  Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-
age the transaxle.
CAUTION Mitsubishi Motors

 Take care not to scratch the engine air flow Genuine NEW 9
Lubricant Special additives
sensor when removing the air cleaner cover. MULTI GEAR OIL
ECO API GL-4
Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-
2. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the Viscosity range SAE 75W-80 mission.
cover back on in its original position.
NOTE Continuously variable Washer fluid

 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom- transmission (CVT) fluid (if N00938601371
mended when replacing the air cleaner filter. The windshield washer fluid reservoir is in
 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make so equipped)
the engine compartment.
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover N00938101129
are firmly set.

The continuously variable transmission
(CVT) should be maintained and serviced by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to obtain the
best performance and longest life. It is impor-

Brake fluid
Check the washer fluid level at regular inter- If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec- Brake fluid authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
essary. N00938701314
repair facility of your choice.
Open the reservoir cap and check the level of
washer fluid. To check the fluid level Fluid type
Full level is approximately 2 inches (5 cm)
below from the upper surface of the reservoir. The fluid level must be between the “MAX”
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir. Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or
DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly
sealed to keep dirt and water out.
Upper surface MAX WARNING

 Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
harmful to the eyes, may irritates your
Full skin and will damage painted surfaces.
9 MIN Wipe up spills immediately.
If brake fluid gets on your hands or in
your eyes, flush immediately with clean
water. Follow up with a doctor as neces-
When freezing weather is anticipated, flush sary.
out the water in the reservoir by operating the The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti- brake pads, but this does not indicate any
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate abnormality. CAUTION
the system for a few seconds to flush out the  Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
residual water. mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This
checked when doing other work under the will damage the seals.
engine hood. The brake system should also be  Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
checked for leaks at the same time. damage painted surfaces.
If the fluid level falls noticeably in a short  Use only the listed brake fluid. Different
length of time, it indicates leaks from the brands of brake fluid have different addi-
brake system. tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.

Battery
facility of your choice before the start of cold
CAUTION weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
 Keep the reservoir cap closed to keep the
will provide more reliable starting, and longer
brake fluid from evaporating.
battery life.
Battery Disconnection and connection

N00939100943
N00901701169
The condition of the battery is very important To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal
electrical system working properly. Check the first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-
battery regularly. nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)
WARNING terminal and then the negative (-) terminal,
Checking battery electrolyte  If the battery goes flat, be sure to check before starting the vehicle.
level the battery electrolyte level before con-
N00901500072
necting booster cables.
NOTE 9
 After checking the battery electrolyte
The electrolyte level must be between the  Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
level, make sure the caps are fitted
limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
securely.
nal of the battery.
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of  If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace
 Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the
the battery is divided into several compart- the battery.
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.
ments. Take the cap off of each compartment
and fill to the mark.
Do not fill above the top line because a spill During cold weather
during driving could cause damage. N00901600060
The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.

This has to do with its chemical and physical
properties and is why a very cold battery,
especially one with a low charge, will have a
hard time starting your vehicle.
It is recommended that you have your battery
and charging system checked by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
Tires
WARNING WARNING Tires

 Never disconnect the battery while the  If you are quick-charging your battery, N00939201635
engine is running, or you could damage first disconnect the battery cables.
the vehicle’s electrical parts.  In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure WARNING
 Never short-circuit the battery. This could to disconnect the negative (-) terminal  Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
cause it to overheat and be damaged. first, and reconnect it last. or improperly inflated is dangerous.
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away  Battery posts, terminals and related acces- These type tire conditions will adversely
from the battery because the battery could sories contain lead and lead compounds. affect vehicle performance.
explode. Wash hands after handling. These type tire conditions can also cause a
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro- tread separation or blowout which may
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on result in an accident causing serious
nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- NOTE injury or death.
color them. And if it gets on your skin or  Check each battery terminal for corrosion.  Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind- You can stop more corrosion by washing time with age even when they are not
ness. Please observe the following han- with a solution of baking soda and water. being used.
9 dling instructions: Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or It is recommended that tires over 6 years
• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or tightening them. generally be replaced even if damage is
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft  Check to see that the battery is securely not obvious.
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of installed and cannot be moved. Also check
water and neutral detergent then imme- each terminal for tightness. It is important to familiarize yourself with the
diately rinse the affected parts with  If you will not be driving your vehicle for a following terms:
plenty of water. long period of time, remove the battery and
• If electrolyte gets on your hands or store it in a place where the battery fluid will  Cold tire pressure:
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If not freeze. The battery only should be stored • The measured pressure after the vehicle
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them with a full charge.
with water immediately and get immedi-
has been parked for at least three hours,
 Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the or
ate medical attention. filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.
 Open doors and windows in any closed • The measured pressure when the vehicle
space where you may be charging or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
working with the battery. having been parked for three hours.
 Always wear protective clothing and gog-  Maximum pressure: the maximum per-
gles when working with the battery, or missible cold tire inflation pressure for
have a skilled automobile technician do it. this tire.

Tires
 Recommended inflation pressure: the  Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor- tread and bead.
Tire Markings
mance.  Section width: the linear distance between
 Intended outboard sidewall: the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
• The sidewall that contains a whitewall, inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
bears white lettering or bears manufac- labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
turer, brand, and/or model name molding  Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
that is higher or deeper than the same steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, cords and that is shaped to fit the rim.
or  Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel
• The outward facing sidewall of an asym- cords.
metrical tire that has a particular side  Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
that must always face outward when tire.
mounted on a vehicle.  Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire 1- Size Designation
 Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use and tube assembly upon which the tire 2- Service Description
on passenger cars, multipurpose passen- beads are seated. 3- Maximum Load 9
ger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross  Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the 4- Maximum Pressure
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 bead seat. 5- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code
pounds or less.  Groove: the space between two adjacent (TIN)
 Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by tread ribs. 6- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature
its manufacturer as primarily intended for Grades
use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
 Tread: portion of a tire that comes into Size Designation
contact with the road.
 Tread rib: a tread section running circum- EXAMPLE: P215/65R15
ferentially around a tire.
Passenger car tire size based on
 Tread separation: pulling away of the P
U.S.A. design standards
tread from the tire carcass.
 Carcass: the tire structure, except tread 215 Section width in millimeters (mm)
and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
bears the load.

Tires
Aspect ratio in percent (%) Service Description WARNING
65 Ratio of section height to section  Overloading of your tire is dangerous.
width of tire. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
EXAMPLE: 95H
Construction code vehicle handling, and increase your stop-
Load index ping distance. Use tires of the recom-
• “R” means radial construction.
R 95 A numerical code associated with mended load capacity for your vehicle.
• “D” means diagonal or bias con-
the maximum load a tire can carry. Never overload them.
struction.
Speed symbol
15 Rim diameter in inches (in)
A symbol indicating the range of
speeds at which a tire can carry a Maximum Pressure
NOTE load corresponding to its load
 European/Japanese metric tire sizing is based index under certain operating con- Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum
on European/Japanese design standards. ditions. permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
H
Tires designed to these standards have the The maximum speed correspond- this tire.
9 tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter “P” is
ing to the speed symbol should
only be achieved under specified
absent from this tire size designation. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
operating conditions. (i.e. tire pres-
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
sure, vehicle loading, road condi-
 LT (Light Truck) -metric tire sizing is based
tions and posted speed limits) The TIN may be found on one or both sides
on U.S.A. design standards. The size desig- of the tire but the date code may only be on
nation for LT-metric tires is the same as for one side. Look for the TIN on the outboard
P-metric tires except for the letters “LT” that Maximum Load side of tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the
are molded into the sidewall preceding the
TIN is not found on the outboard side then
size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16. Maximum load indicates the maximum load you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
 Temporary spare tires are high pressure com- this tire is designed to carry.
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1504
pact spares designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Tires designed to this Department of Transportation
standard have the letter “T” molded into the This symbol certifies that the tire is
sidewall preceding the size designation. in compliance with the U.S.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
DOT
Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved
for highway use.

Tires
Code representing the tire manu- vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause
MA Traction
facturing location. (2 digits) problems in three major areas:
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
Code representing the tire size. (2  Safety
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
L9 digits) Too little pressure increases flexing in the
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 tire and can cause tire failure. Too much
measured under controlled conditions on
to 4 digits) pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
Number representing the week in to cushion shock. Objects on the road and
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
15 which the tire was manufactured. potholes could then cause tire damage that
traction performance.
(2 digits) may result in tire failure.
 Economy
Number representing the year in Temperature The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven
04 which the tire was manufactured.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B wear patterns in the tire tread. These
(2 digits)
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the abnormal wear patterns will reduce the
tread life, and the tire will have to be
Treadwear, Traction and Temper-
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions replaced sooner. 9
ature Grades on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Too little pressure also makes it harder for
Sustained high temperature can cause the the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce  Ride comfort and vehicle stability
Treadwear The superior riding experience built into
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre- your vehicle partly depends on the correct
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested sponds to a level of performance which all tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an
under controlled conditions on a specified passenger car tires must meet under the Fed- uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little
government test course. For example, a tire eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to
graded 150 would wear one and one-half Grades B and A represent higher levels of respond.
performance on the laboratory test wheel than Unequal tire pressures can make steering
(11/2) times as well on the government course
the minimum required by law. your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor-
their use, however, and may depart signifi- Tire inflation pressures mal driving conditions is listed on the placard
cantly from the norm due to variations in N00939301984 attached to the driver’s door sill.
driving habits, service practices and differ- Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for (Refer to “Tire and loading information plac-
ences in road characteristics and climate. the safe and satisfactory operation of your ard” on page 11-3.)

Tires
The recommended inflation pressures under specified cold pressure, or your tires will be
normal driving conditions should be used for too low.
CAUTION
 If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-
the tires listed below. Check your tires each time you refuel. If one
sure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi
tire looks lower than the others, check the
Motors Genuine wheels should be used.
Item Tire size Front Rear pressure for all of them. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
240 240 You should also take the following safety pre- and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
165/65R14 kPa, kPa, cautions: to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
35 psi 35 psi
Normal tire  Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
220 220 mended pressures. (See the tire and load- Tire maintenance
175/55R15 kPa, kPa, ing information placard attached to the N00939701193
32 psi 32 psi driver’s door sill.) The following maintenance steps are recom-
Compact  Stay within the recommended load limits. mended:
T115/70D14 420 kPa, 60 psi  Make sure that the weight of any load in
spare wheel
your vehicle is evenly distributed.  Check tire pressures regularly.
9  Drive at safe speeds.  Have regular maintenance done on the
Tire pressures should be checked, and wheel balance and front and rear suspen-
 After filling your tires to the correct pres-
adjusted if necessary, at least once a month. sion alignment.
sure, check them for damage and air
Pressures should be checked more often  Rotate your tires regularly as described in
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the
whenever weather temperatures change the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-17.
valve stems.
severely, because tire pressures change with
outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed
are always “cold inflation pressure”. Replacing tires and wheels
Cold inflation pressure is measured after the N00939601482
vehicle has been parked for at least three

hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) CAUTION
after having been parked for three hours.  Avoid using different size tires from the one
Cold inflation pressure must not go above the listed and the combined use of different
maximum values molded into the tire side- types of tires, as this can affect driving
safety.
wall. After driving several miles, your tire
Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.
inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14
to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.
Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the

Tires
Tread wear indicator Tire rotation Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation
N00939801240 N00939901557 direction
To even out the wear on your tires and make
Front
them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND Tires that have arrows showing rotation direc-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. tion
However, the timing for tire rotation may
vary according to your vehicle condition,
road surface conditions, and your own per- Front
sonal driving habits. Any time you notice
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-
1- Location of the tread wear indicator sible.
2- Tread wear indicator
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear, 9
damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal CAUTION
Tread wear indicators are built into the origi- wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-  A compact spare tire can be installed tempo-
nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help sure, wheels that are not aligned properly, rarily in place of a tire that has been removed
you know when your tires should be replaced. wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe during the tire rotation. However, it must not
Many states have laws requiring that you be included in the regular tire rotation
braking.
sequence.
replace your tires at this point. Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
These indicators are molded into the bottom dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
of the tread grooves and will appear when the find out the reason for uneven tread wear.
tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6
mm). The first tire rotation is the most important
When the bands appear next to one another in one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.
two or more places, replace your tires.
NOTE
 Tire wear indicators can have different marks
and locations depending on the tire manufac-
turer.

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)
CAUTION Snow tires Clutch pedal free play (if so

 If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the N00940001444
equipped)
correct direction of rotation, swap the front In some areas of the country, snow tires are N00940200090
and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
required for winter driving. If snow tires are
vehicle and the front and rear tires on the
required in your area, you must choose snow To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn
right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
Keep each tire on its original side of the tires of the same size and type as the original off the engine and press the pedal until you
vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires feel resistance.
the arrows point in the direction in which the should also be installed on all four wheels.
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling Clutch pedal free play:
ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the can be reduced. .4 to .6 inch (11 to 16 mm)
wrong direction will not perform to its full Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
potential. should not be operated at sustained speeds
over 75 mph (120 km/h).
9 CAUTION
Front
 If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-
sure monitoring system, only Mitsubishi
Motors Genuine wheels should be used.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
If the free play is not within these limits, take

your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
Tire chains
N00940100116
CAUTION choice for adjustment.
 Avoid the combined use of different types of CAUTION
tires. Using different types of tires can affect  Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
vehicle performance and safety. The clearance between the chains and the
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
aged.

Brake pedal free play
Brake pedal free play Parking brake WARNING

N00940300336 N00940400252  Continued operation of the vehicle with
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn the parking brake lever out of adjustment
off the engine and press the brake pedal sev- may result in the vehicle moving when
Parking brake lever stroke unattended.
eral times with your foot. Then press the
pedal down with your fingers until you first Check the parking brake lever travel occa-
feel resistance. sionally. To check this, pull the lever up
slowly and count the number of clicks of the Wiper blades
Brake pedal free play: ratchet. N00940701223
.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean
Parking brake lever stroke: them regularly to remove deposits of salt and
7 to 9 notches (clicks) road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild
(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
the force of 200 N) blades and glass areas.
Replace the blades if they continue to streak 9
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by
the ratchet after pulling. or smear.
NOTE
 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long
time. This wears out the rubber and can
scratch the glass.
If the free play is not within these limits, take
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your During cold weather
choice for adjustment.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
motor may be damaged.

Emission-control system maintenance
Emission-control system NOTE Fuel hoses

maintenance  To meet government regulations and pro-
mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped
N00941000040
N00940800328
Check the hose surfaces for any heat and
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission- The engine electronic control module that
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
control system that meets all the requirements controls OBD functions stores various data
(especially about the exhaust emissions). cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
This data will be erased if the battery cable is sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check
and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
disconnected, which could make a rapid all the hose connections, such as clamps and
trol system is made of:
diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the couplings, to make sure they are secure and
 a positive crankcase ventilation system battery cable when the engine malfunction that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or
indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or damage, replace the hoses immediately.
 an evaporative emission-control system
“Check engine light”) is ON.
 an exhaust emission-control system
Intake valve clearance
To be sure the emission-control system works
9 properly, have your vehicle inspected and Spark plugs N00950100050
Have the valve clearance checked at an

maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi N00940900228
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your Spark plugs must fire properly for good
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
choice. This should be done at the time or engine performance and emission-control.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. Change them at the mileage listed in the
adjustments made by an authorized
These, and all the other “general” mainte- “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
nance services listed in this manual, need to MANUAL”.
be performed to keep your vehicle running
properly and reliably. NOTE Fuel system (tank, pipe line and
You should also have an inspection and ser- connection, and fuel tank filler
 Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine
vice any time you suspect a malfunction. specifications” on page 11-5 or plugs that are cap)
exactly the same. Other plugs could cause N00941300173
engine damage, performance problems or
radio noise. Check these regularly for damage or leaks in
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay
special attention to the fuel lines closest to
General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani- there are other parts which do not usually
fold. need regular maintenance.
Ball joint, steering linkage seals
But, if any of these parts stops working prop- and drive shaft boots
WARNING erly, your vehicle performance could suffer. N00941800077
 If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,

Have these items checked if you notice a Check the following parts for damage and
do not run the engine. Any spark (includ- problem with them. grease leaks:
ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
material could cause an explosion or fire. If you have any questions, see your autho-  Ball joint boots of the front suspension
Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance. and steering linkage
dealer or a repair facility of your choice  Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
for assistance.
Disc brake pads
N00941600059 Exhaust system
Good brakes are essential for safe driving. N00942200111
Evaporative emission control Check the brake pads for wear. For good
system (except evaporative braking performance, replace the brake pads WARNING 9
emission canister) with the same type pads as the originals.  Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these
N00941400187
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.
If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam- Brake hoses
aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol- N00941700076
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
luting the air. Brake hoses and tubing should be checked from entering inside your vehicle is to have
Have the system checked at an authorized for: the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-  Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn plete exhaust system and nearby body areas
NANCE MANUAL”. spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo-
showing through any cracks or worn spots sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow-
General maintenance in the rubber hose cover, the hose should ing:
be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
N00941500292
hose wears through.  A change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
The next pages list the maintenance service  Improper installation may cause twisting, tem
recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo- or wheel, tire or chassis interference.  The smell of exhaust fumes inside the
ration. In addition to the general maintenance vehicle
that needs to be performed at the times listed,
For cold and snowy weather

 The underside or rear of the vehicle is nism until all the movable surfaces are cov- snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for
damaged ered. the windshield, side and rear window are also
Also, put a light coat of the same grease on useful.
Also check the exhaust system each time the the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,
or required service. Any open seams or loose Fusible links
connections could let dangerous exhaust For cold and snowy weather N00942700305
fumes seep into the luggage and passenger N00942600102

The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if
compartments. a large current attempts to flow through cer-
Ventilation slots tain electrical systems.
Check for any of the following In case of a melted fusible link, see your
The ventilation slots in front of the wind- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
conditions: repair facility of your choice for inspection
shield should be brushed clear after a heavy
 Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks snowfall so that the operation of the heating and replacement.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
9 caused by corrosion or damage. and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
load capacities” on page 9-23.
 Check the joints and connections for
looseness or exhaust gas leaks. Weatherstripping
 Check the rubber hangers and brackets for WARNING
damage.  Fusible links must not be replaced by any
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,
Hood lock release mechanism be treated with silicone grease. property destruction and serious or fatal
and safety catch injuries at any time.
N00942500127
Additional equipment (For
The hood lock release mechanism and hood regions where snow is encoun-
safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and Fuses
oiled when needed for easy movement and to tered) N00942800902
prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose

Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short- Fuse block location
parts of the hood latch and release lever. handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
Work the grease into the hood lock mecha- ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping To prevent damage to the electrical system
from short-circuiting or overloading, each
Fuses
individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
Passenger compartment fuse loca-
fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
partment and in the engine compartment. Type A
tion table
Passenger compartment
Type B
The fuse block in the passenger compartment
is located in front of the driver’s seat at the
position shown in the illustration.
Sym- Capac- 9
No. Electrical system
Fuse load capacities bol ity
N00954801342 1 Tail light (left) 7.5 A
This fuse list shows the names of the electri- 2 Cigarette lighter 15 A
cal systems and their fuse capacities.
There are spare fuses in the fuse block in the 3 Ignition coil 10 A
engine compartment. Always replace a blown 4 Starter motor 7.5 A
Engine compartment fuse with one of the same capacity as the
original. 5 — — —
6 — — —
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
located as shown in the illustration. 7 Tail light (right) 7.5 A
While pressing the tab (A or B), pull up the Outside rearview
cover. 8 7.5 A
mirrors
9 Engine control unit 7.5 A
10 Control unit 7.5 A

Fuses
Sym- Capac-  The table above shows the main equip- Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system ment corresponding to each fuse. No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity
11 Rear fog light 10 A BF1 DC-DC (P/T) 30 A
Engine compartment fuse location
12 Door lock 15 A table BF2 DC-DC (AUDIO) 30 A
Interior light (Dome Headlight (low
13 15 A F1 10 A
light) Type A beam) (left)
14 Rear window wiper 15 A Headlight (low
F2 10 A
beam) (right)
15 Gauges 7.5 A
Headlight (high
16 Relay 7.5 A F3 10 A
beam) (left)
17 Heated seats 20 A Headlight (high
F4 10 A
18 Option 10 A beam) (right)
9 F5 Horn 10 A
Heated outside rear-
19 7.5 A
view mirrors F6 Front fog lights 15 A
20 Windshield wiper 20 A Daytime running
F7 10 A
21 Back-up light 7.5 A lights
F8 — — —
22 Defogger 30 A
Sym- Capac- F9 — — —
No. Electrical system
23 Heater 30 A bol ity
Battery current
24 — — — SBF1 Radiator fan motor 40 A* F10 7.5 A
sensor
25 Radio 10 A Anti-lock braking F11 — — —
SBF2 30 A*
Electronic con- system Stop lights (Brake
26 15 A F12 15 A
trolled unit SBF3 Ignition switch 40 A* lights)
Power window F13 Ignition coil 7.5 A
 Some fuses may not be installed on your SBF4 40 A*
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model control F14 Engine control 7.5 A
or specifications.

Fuses
Sym- Capac- 15 A: Cigarette lighter
No. Electrical system Type B
bol ity When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
F15 Alternator 7.5 A ble.
Hazard warning
F16 10 A
flasher Identification of fuse
Automatic trans-
F17 15 A
axle
Capacity Color
F18 Air conditioning 10 A 7.5 A Brown
F19 ETV 15 A 10 A Red
Sym- Capac- 15 A Blue
F20 Starter 7.5 A No. Electrical system
bol ity
F21 CVT oil/pump 15 A 20 A Yellow
SBF1 PTC heater 40 A*
F22 Fuel pump 15 A 30 A
Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible 9
SBF2 PTC heater 40 A* link type)
F23 Engine 20 A 40 A Green (fusible link type)
SBF3 PTC heater 40 A*
Automatic trans-
F24 7.5 A
axle *: Fusible link Fuse replacement
#1 — Spare fuse 20 A
N00954900131
 Some fuses may not be installed on your
#2 — Spare fuse 30 A 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
or specifications. the electrical item concerned to the fuse
*: Fusible link and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
 The table above shows the main equip-
ment corresponding to each fuse. position or put the operation mode in
 Some fuses may not be installed on your OFF.
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model 2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine
or specifications. The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,
10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fuses compartment fuse block.
 The table above shows the main equip-
ment corresponding to each fuse. burns out, substitute with the following fuse.
7.5 A: Outside rearview mirrors
10 A: Option

Replacement of light bulbs

N00942901362
Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is

off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy
the bulb when it gets hot.
CAUTION
B- Fuse is OK  Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, C- Blown fuse being turned off.
and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool
block. sufficiently before touching it. You could
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
9 securely into the appropriate slot.
otherwise be burned.
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
inside halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
CAUTION halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than  Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire, hand, dirty glove, etc.
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
to heat up and could cause a fire. to break the next time the headlights are
 If the replacement fuse blows again after a used.
short time, have the electrical system If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors alcohol and let it dry completely before
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to installing the bulb.
4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
find and correct the cause.
matching tables, to check the fuse that is
related to the problem. If the fuse is not
blown, something else must be causing
the problem. Have the system inspected
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

NOTE ANSI
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
Watt- Trade No.
Description
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes age or Bulb
becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same type
phenomenon as when window glass mists up Front turn signal
on a humid day, and does not indicate a func- 1 32/3 cp #1157NA
light/Parking light
tional problem.
When the light is switched on, the heat will Headlight/Day-
9007
remove the fog. However, if water gathers 2 time running light —
HB5
inside the light, please have it checked by an (if so equipped)
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Front fog light (if
repair facility of your choice. 3 55 W H11
so equipped)
CAUTION
 Do not install commercially available LED- Front side-marker
Bulb capacity 4
light
5W W5W
type bulbs.
Commercially available LED-type bulbs
N00943000132
Side turn signal 9
could adversely affect the operation of the The bulb should only be replaced with a new
5 light (on fender, if 5W —
vehicle, such as by preventing the lights and bulb with the same rating and type. The type
other vehicle equipment from operating
so equipped)
and rating are listed on the base of the bulb.
properly. Side turn signal
light (on outside
Outside 6
rearview mirror, if
— —
NOTE N00950302043
so equipped)
 If you are unsure of how to carry out the Front
work as required, it is recommended that
these procedures be carried out by an autho- NOTE
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair  It is not possible to repair or replace only the
facility of your choice. bulb for the side turn signal light (on fender).
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
when removing a light and lens. dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.

NOTE ANSI Inside

 The side turn signal light (on outside rear-
trade No.
Item Wattage N00950401715
view mirror) uses an LED rather than the or bulb

bulb. For repair and replacement, contact an type
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Tail and stop
repair facility of your choice. 5 21/5 W P21/5W
light
Rear side-marker
Rear 6 5W W5W
light
NOTE
 The high-mounted stop light uses an LED
rather than the bulbs. For repair and replace-
ment, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
9 Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
ANSI
trade No.
Item Wattage
or bulb
type
High-mounted
1 — — Item Wattage
stop light
License plate 1 Dome light 8W
2 5W W5W
light 2 Trunk room light 5W
3 Back-up light 21 W P21W
Rear turn signal
4 21 W PY21W
light


3. To install the bulb, perform the removal 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
Headlights/Daytime running steps in reverse.
lights (if so equipped)
N00901801203
Headlight aim adjustment
1. While pressing the tab (A), pull out the N00943200352
connector (B).
The alignment of the headlights should be
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Front side-marker lights

N00917301681
1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
remove it. steps in reverse.
9
Front turn signal lights/Parking
*- Front of the vehicle
lights
N00943401478
2. Remove the locking cap (C) by turning it 1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to
counterclockwise, and then pull the bulb remove it.
(D).


2. Remove the bulb from the socket by turn- 2. Remove the 3 screws (B) and remove the 3. Depress the tab (D) on the harness con-
ing it counterclockwise while pressing in. light unit. nector and pull the harness connector (E)
to remove it.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse. NOTE 4. Turn the bulb (F) counterclockwise to
9  When unfastening the screw of the fog light, remove it.
be careful not to mistakenly move the beam
Front fog lights (if so equipped) position adjustment screw (C).
N00943601904
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-

driver with a cloth over its tip at the edge
of the cover (A) and pry gently to remove
the cover.

steps in reverse.


4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to
Rear combination lights remove it. Type 1 Type 2
N00943701572
1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light
unit.

D- Back-up light steps in reverse.
E- Rear turn signal light
F- Tail and stop light NOTE 9
G- Rear side-marker light  When mounting the light unit, align the
3. Move the light unit toward the rear of the notch (H) and pin (I) on the light unit with
vehicle to unfix the notch (B) and pin (C). the clip (J) and hole (K) in the body.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket as fol-
lows.
• Type 1: Rear side-marker light bulb
Pull the bulb out.
• Type 2: Other light bulb
Turn the bulb counterclockwise while
pressing in.

Vehicle care precautions
License plate lights Vehicle care precautions CAUTION

N00944001439 N00945100166 • Nail Polish Remover
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise to In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, These can all be dangerous, and they all can
remove it, and then pull the bulb out of perform regular maintenance using the proper damage your vehicle.
the socket. materials and procedures. Be sure to use only
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula- Cleaning the inside of your
tions. Choose the materials you will use care- vehicle
fully, to be sure that they do not contain N00945200095
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an
After washing the inside of your vehicle with
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
in choosing these materials.
lated area.
9 CAUTION CAUTION
 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some
 Do not use organic substances (solvents,
are poisonous and others are highly flamma-
benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or
ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their
alkaline or acidic solutions.
fumes in a closed space. When you use any-
These chemicals can cause discoloring,
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be
staining or cracking of the surface.
sure to follow the instructions. Always open
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re
sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
cleaning the inside. Never use the following
stances mentioned above.
chemicals to clean your vehicle:
• Gasoline
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Benzine
NOTE
2. To install the bulb, perform the removal  Always read the instructions on the cleaner
steps in reverse. • Kerosene
label.
• Naphtha
• Acetone
• Turpentine
• Paint Thinner
• Lacquer Thinner

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
NOTE
flocked parts leather should be cleaned with an appro-  If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew
N00945300142 priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
may grow.
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a
 The genuine leather surface can be damaged
soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber
and water. water. brush.
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum  Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
wring it out well, and wipe off all the cleaner and remove any stains with carpet alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents
soap. cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by can discolor the genuine leather surface and
lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth should not be used.
NOTE and spot remover.  Genuine leather can mildew if not kept
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.
 Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
 The genuine leather surface may harden and
tectants containing silicones or wax. NOTE shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight
Such products, when applied to the instru-
ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, 9
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush place it in the shade as much as possible.
tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
over the surface in one direction.  When the temperature of the vehicle interior
Also, if such products get on the switches of
the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail- rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
ure of these accessories. genuine leather seat may deteriorate and
Genuine leather (if so equipped) stick to the seat.
N00945600187
Upholstery 1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a

N00945500128 soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen- Cleaning the outside of your
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi- tle soap and water. vehicle
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, N00945700058
keep the interior clean. wring it out well, and wipe off all the
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often
soap.
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-
face.

Foreign material CAUTION During cold weather

N00945800033  When washing the underside of your vehicle
Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro- Salt and other chemicals spread on winter
tect your hands. roads in some geographical areas can have a
tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
 Never spray or splash water on the electrical detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.
foreign matters can damage the finish on your
parts in the engine compartment. This may You should flush the underbody with a high
vehicle.
damage them. Be careful also when washing
Generally, the longer any foreign material pressure hose every time you wash the out-
the underbody to ensure that water does not
stays on the finish, the worse the damage. enter the engine compartment.
side of your vehicle.
Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-  Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-
Take special care to remove mud or other
ever the finish gets soiled. ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the debris which could trap and hold salt and
paint surface and make it dull. moisture.
Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- After washing your vehicle, wipe off all
Washing ored vehicles. waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
N00945901666
 Some hot water washing equipment uses doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
9 Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.
picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur- Because hot water can damage plastics parts
faces can damage the paint and body of your and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you
NOTE
do the following when using such equip-  When the door is frozen, opening it by force
vehicle if left on.
ment: may tear off or crack the rubber gasket
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way installed around the door. Pour warm water
to protect your vehicle from this damage. • Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches
to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe
(70 cm) away from the vehicle body.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. off the water after opening the door. To pre-
• When washing around the door glass, hold
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
the nozzle at a distance of more than 28
water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-
inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, cant.
glass surface.
wash the vehicle from top to bottom.  Make sure to do the following when using an
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. automatic car wash, with help from either
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- this manual or the car wash operator, to Waxing
ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, avoid damaging your vehicle: N00946000234
carefully clean the joints and flanges of the • Fold the outside rearview mirrors. Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to • Remove the antenna. when water does not bead up on the paint.
remain.


Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has the compound from the surface and apply a
CAUTION
 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.
ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
tic surface.
You should wax when the painted surfaces
Damaged paint  Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-
are cool. line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases,
N00946200092
paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat
CAUTION should be touched up as soon as possible with
trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,
 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds cracks, or discoloration.
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe
should not be used. These waxes remove rust
Check body areas facing the road or the tires them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a
and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
are harmful to the finish of the paint, because
carefully for damage to the paint caused by mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse
they also remove paint/clearcoat. flying stones, etc. The paint code number for them immediately with water.
They are also harmful to other glossy sur- your vehicle can be found on the vehicle
information code plate on the front passenger
faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc. Chrome parts 9
 Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or door sill.
N00946400052
paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt
from the vehicle surface. To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome
 Do not put wax on the areas having black
Cleaning plastic parts parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and
matte coating because it can cause uneven
N00946300194 apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the
discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a
wax on them, wipe the wax off right away If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black commercially available chrome polish.
with a soft cloth and warm water. rough surface of the bumper, molding or
lights, the surface may appear white in color.
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped)
In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
Polishing and a soft cloth or chamois.
N00946501236
N00946100046
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge.
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can-
If painted surfaces have been severely dam- CAUTION not be removed easily with water.
aged and lost their original luster and color  Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough Rinse off the detergent after washing the
tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine scrubber as these may damage the plastic
wheels.
polishing compound. Avoid limiting your surface.
3. Dry the wheels thoroughly using a cham-
polishing to the damaged surface only; polish ois leather or a soft cloth.
a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing
CAUTION Engine compartment

 Do not use a brush or other hard implement N00947000071
on the wheels. Never spray or splash water on the electrical

 Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra- accessories in the engine compartment. This
sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing
puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
so could cause the coating on the wheels to
Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
peel or become discolored or stained.
plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
 Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
cleaner or by any other means. ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
 Contact with seawater or road salt used for crack, stain or discolor them.
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
substances as soon as possible. chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
the affected parts with plenty of water.
9 Window glass N00946600054
The window glass can usually be cleaned

using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead
insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
Wiper blades
N00946700084
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove

grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
blades.
Replace the wiper blades when they no longer
clean the windshield properly.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047101208 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart- Grades B and A represent higher levels of
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects. the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201573
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition bean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
You can also obtain other informa- of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
tion about motor vehicle safety from SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
http://www.safercar.gov. Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3

Important facts to know in case of an accident

 Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Important facts to know in Many times, to save money, your insur-
Consumer rights (For vehicles
case of an accident ance company will recommend imitation sold in U.S.A.)
N01047300232 parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance As a consumer requesting repair on your
accident, but there is always that potential or workmanship. vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and country, State Insurance Commissioners have
drive safely. Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro- begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
tection will have to disclose to the consumer when
In the event of an accident they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
The strength and integrity built into your ulations are not consistent on this point,
 Remain calm.
Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific remember you have a choice. So, if you want
 Check for injuries. Report all injuries to
design referred to as “Energy Management”. genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
the police, and, if necessary, call for an
Individual body parts are designed to act as have to specifically request them. Make cer-
ambulance.
one unit in the event of an accident. Shock tain your insurance company understands
 Record all the details of the accident. This
10 will provide you with accurate records of
waves are absorbed by protective panels or imitations are not to be used in the repair of
are channeled around the passenger compart- your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
the accident for discussions with your
ment. This important feature is possible Mitsubishi Motors parts.
insurance company and other persons
because high tensile steel is used in
who may be acting on your behalf.
Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, some-
thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manu-
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
Key information to discuss with facturers of imitation parts. All Genuine parts
your insurance company Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets
are designed and constructed as important Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built
 Understand your repair estimate before protection features in the event of an acci- with the high quality and durability standards
approving repairs. dent. By replacing body parts with non-Genu- you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
 Choosing the repair shop and the brands ine Mitsubishi Motors parts, your vehicle replacements parts are your guarantee that
of parts that they use on your vehicle is may no longer meet original equipment spec- your vehicle will have all the technological
your decision. ifications. advantages and maintain the style and protec-
tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Important facts to know in case of an accident

Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Motors parts.
10
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-4
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-5
Battery ............................................................................................11-5
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Capacity .........................................................................................11-6
11
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling 1 - Vehicle emission control Chassis number

N01147401895 information label
Keep a record of the chassis number and The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-
vehicle identification number. Such informa- head as shown in the illustration.
The vehicle emission control information
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen. label is affixed on the underside of the engine
hood.
2 - Vehicle identification num-

ber plate
The vehicle identification number is stamped

on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
11 3 - Air conditioning label
The air conditioning label is affixed on the

inside panel of the engine hood.
4 - Vehicle information code

plate
The vehicle information code plate is located

on the front passenger door sill.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
Engine model/serial number Certification label

N01148200242
The engine model and serial number are The certification label is located on the
stamped on the cylinder block as shown in driver’s door sill.
the illustration.

Vehicle dimensions 11
N01147501652
Tire and loading information Overall length 169.5 in (4,305 mm)

placard Overall width 65.7 in (1,670 mm)
N01148101639
Overall height 59.3 in (1,505 mm)
The tire and loading information placard is
located on the driver’s door sill. Wheel base 100.4 in (2,550 mm)
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle weights
Vehicle weights
N01147602012
Item Manual transaxle Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 3,053 lb (1,385 kg) 3,108 lb (1,410 kg)
Gross axle weight rating Front 1,609 lb (730 kg)
(GAWR) Rear 1,521 lb (690 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)
NOTE
 Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10.
11 GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants
11-4 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
N01147701612
Engine model 3A92

Engine displacement 72.8 CID (1,193 cm3)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-3
Bore 2.95 in (75.0 mm)
Stroke 3.54 in (90.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.5:1
Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C)
Spark plugs NGK LZFR5DI-11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-2
Battery Size 14 x 5 J 15 x 5 1/2J 11

N01147800296 Wheel PCD 3.93 in (100 mm)
55D23L (356CCA/99RC) Offset 1.5 in (38 mm)
PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation

Battery is a 12 volt type.
holes)
Tires and wheels NOTE

N01147901858  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details on the combination used on
165/65R14 175/55R15
Tire your vehicle.
79S 77V
 These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions
described in this owner’s manual.
Specifications 11-5
Capacity
Capacity
N01148002299
Item Capacity Lubricants

Fuel
9.2 gal (35 L) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2
(approximate)
Oil pan 2.9 qt (2.8 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-
burst” symbol) on the container.
Engine oil
Oil filter .21 qt (0.2 L) If these oils are not available, an API classification SN or
higher can be used.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO
Manual transaxle 1.7 qt (1.6 L)
API GL-4 SAE 75W-80
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.4 qt (7.0 L)
page 9-9.
Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
11 Manual trans-
Engine coolant 4.2 qt (4.0 L)
axle Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium
{Includes .53 qt (0.5 L) in reserve
or equivalent*
tank} CVT 4.8 qt (4.6 L)
Washer fluid 2.6 qt (2.5 L) —
Refer to the “Air con-
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ditioning label” on HFC-134a
page 11-2.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
11-6 Specifications
Alphabetical index
Disconnection and connection ......... 9-11 Certification label ............................... 11-3
A During cold weather ....................... 9-11 Charging system warning light ............. 5-77
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-5 Specification.................................. 11-5
Child restraint systems ........................ 4-14
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-51 Bottle holders..................................... 5-94
Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-26
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8 Brake
Cleaning
Fluid ............................................. 11-6
Air conditioning Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-32
Automatic air conditioning .............. 7-12 Brake assist system............................. 5-48 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-33
Important air conditioning operating tips.. Braking ............................................... 6-5 Clutch
7-18 Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-49 Pedal free play................................ 9-18
Manual air conditioning .................... 7-7 Hose ............................................. 9-21
Consumer information......................... 10-2
Air purifier ......................................... 7-19 Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-47
Parking brake................................. 5-32 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...
Airbag ............................................... 4-22 5-41
Pedal............................................. 5-46
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-35 Pedal free play ............................... 9-19 Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-6
Antenna ............................................. 7-19 Power brakes ................................. 5-46 Selector lever operation ................... 5-41
Service brake ................................. 5-46 Selector lever positions.................... 5-43
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-49
Warning lights ............................... 5-75 Convenience hook............................... 5-94
Arm rest............................................... 4-5
Break-in recommendations.................... 5-2 Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-6
Assist grip .......................................... 5-95
Automatic air conditioning .................. 7-12
Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-27 Cruise control ..................................... 5-54 12
Cup holders ........................................ 5-93
C
B
California Perchlorate Materials D
Back-up light Requirements..................................... 3-7
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Daytime running lights
Replacement .................................. 9-31 Capacities .......................................... 11-6 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Card holder........................................ 5-86 Replacement................................... 9-29
Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive
shaft boots........................................ 9-21 Cargo loads........................................ 6-10 Defogger (rear window) ...................... 5-83
Battery............................................... 9-11 Cargo room light Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door
Charging system warning light......... 5-77 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28 windows) ......................... 7-6, 7-10, 7-17
Checking battery electrolyte level..... 9-11 Catalytic converter ............................... 9-3 Dimensions ........................................ 11-3
12-1
Alphabetical index
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ......... 5-80 Engine hood ........................................ 9-4 Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-21 Engine switch ..................................... 5-13 Fuel economy................................... 6-2
Fuel hoses...................................... 9-20
Dome light Exhaust system ................................... 9-21
Fuel remaining warning display ....... 5-69
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-28
Fuel selection ................................... 3-2
Door-ajar warning buzzer .................... 5-77 F Tank capacity................................. 11-6
Door-ajar warning light ....................... 5-77 Floor mat............................................. 6-2 Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-15
Doors Fluid Fuel remaining display ........................ 5-69
Lock.............................................. 5-24 Brake fluid ..................................... 11-6 Fuses ................................................. 9-22
Power door locks ............................ 5-25 Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
Fusible links....................................... 9-22
Driving during cold weather .................. 6-4 fluid...................................... 9-9, 11-6
Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2 Engine coolant ......................... 9-7, 11-6
Manual transaxle............................. 11-6 G
Washer fluid ............................ 9-9, 11-6 General maintenance
E Fluid capacities and lubricants.............. 11-6 Maintenance................................... 9-21
Electric power steering system (EPS) ... 5-50
Free-hand advanced security transmitter General vehicle data............................ 11-3
Electric rear window defogger switch ... 5-83 (F.A.S.T.-key) ................................... 5-9 Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Front fog lights Glove compartment............................. 5-93
system) ..................................... 5-3, 5-19
12 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-27
Emission-control system maintenance .. 9-20 Indicators ....................................... 5-75
Replacement................................... 9-30 H
Engine
Compartment ................................... 9-5 Switch............................................ 5-81 Hazard warning flasher switch ............. 5-81
Coolant................................... 9-7, 11-6 Front seat adjustment............................ 4-2 Hazard warning lights ......................... 5-75
High coolant temperature warning light .... Front side-marker lights Head restraints...................................... 4-5
5-77 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-27 Headlights
Hood ............................................... 9-4 Replacement................................... 9-29 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Model............................................ 11-3
Front turn signal lights Dimmer ......................................... 5-80
Oil and oil filter....................... 9-5, 11-6
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-27 Headlight flasher ............................ 5-80
Overheating ..................................... 8-4
Replacement................................... 9-29 Replacement .................................. 9-29
Serial number................................. 11-3
Fuel Switch ........................................... 5-78
Specification .................................. 11-5
12-2
Alphabetical index
Heater without air conditioning function . 7-4 Manual window control....................... 5-29
High beam indicator............................ 5-75 J Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ..
High coolant temperature warning light 5-77 Jack 3-5
Garage jack up position..................... 9-3 Multi-information display ........... 5-63, 5-64
High-mounted stop light
Storage............................................ 8-5
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2
Hill start assist .................................... 5-47 O
HomeLink® Wireless Control System .. 5-86 Octane number ..................................... 3-2
K
Hood lock release mechanism and safety Oil
catch................................................ 9-22 Key slot............................................. 5-18 Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-6
Hook Keyless entry system .................... 5-6, 5-21 Manual transaxle oil................. 9-9, 11-6
Convenience hook .......................... 5-94 Keys ................................................... 5-2 Oil pressure warning light.................... 5-77
Horn switch........................................ 5-84 Operation mode .................................. 5-13
L Operation under adverse driving conditions..
I Labeling ............................................ 11-2 8-13
If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2 License plate lights Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-35
Ignition switch.................................... 5-36 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Overheating.......................................... 8-4
Replacement .................................. 9-32
Important facts to know in case of an accident 12
10-4 Link System....................................... 5-84 P
Indicator and warning light package ..... 5-74 Loading information ............................. 6-6 Parking ................................................ 6-5
Indicators ........................................... 5-75 Lubricants ......................................... 11-6 Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-19
Information display............................. 5-66 Parking brake ............................ 5-32, 9-19
Inside emergency trunk lid release........ 5-28 M Parking lights
Malfunction indicator light .................. 5-76 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Inside rearview mirror ......................... 5-33
Replacement................................... 9-29
Instrument panel light dimmer control .. 5-67 Manual air conditioning ........................ 7-7
Polishing............................................ 9-35
Interior lights...................................... 5-91 Manual transaxle ................................ 5-39
Oil .......................................... 9-9, 11-6 Power brakes ...................................... 5-46
Shift points .................................... 5-40 Power outlet ....................................... 5-86
12-3
Alphabetical index
Power windows .................................. 5-29 Child restraint systems..................... 4-14 Sun visors .......................................... 5-85
Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6 Front passenger seat belt warning light..... Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-22
4-11 How the Supplemental Restraint System
Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-22 works .......................................... 4-25
R Seat belt extender............................ 4-13 Maintenance service ....................... 4-36
Radio Seat belt force limitter system .......... 4-14
General information about your radio 7-20 Seat belt instructions ........................ 4-8
Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-13 T
Rear combination lights
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-13 Tail lights
Replacement .................................. 9-31 Seats ................................................... 4-2 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Arm rest .......................................... 4-5 Replacement .................................. 9-31
Rear seat .............................................. 4-5
Front seats ....................................... 4-2 Tank capacity ..................................... 11-6
Rear side-marker lights Head restraints ................................. 4-5
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27 Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-58
Heated seats..................................... 4-4
Replacement .................................. 9-31 Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2 Tires.................................................. 9-12
Rear turn signal lights Inflation pressures .......................... 9-15
Service brake ...................................... 5-46 Maintenance................................... 9-16
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27
Replacement .................................. 9-31 Service precautions .............................. 9-2 Quality grading .............................. 10-2
Side turn signal lights Replacing tires and wheels .............. 9-16
Rear-view camera ............................... 5-61
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-27 Rotation......................................... 9-17
12 Rearview mirror
Snow tires .......................................... 9-18
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5
Inside rearview mirror..................... 5-33 Snow tires...................................... 9-18
Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-35 Spark plugs......................................... 9-20 Tire and loading information placard 11-3
Replacement of light bulbs .................. 9-26 Starting the engine............................... 5-37 Tire chains ..................................... 9-18
Replacing tires and wheels .................. 9-16 Steering To change a tire................................ 8-6
Electric power steering system (EPS) 5-50 Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-17
Reporting Safety Defects..................... 10-2
Steering wheel height adjustment...... 5-33 Tools ................................................... 8-5
Stop lights Storage ............................................ 8-5
S Bulb capacity.................................. 9-27 Towing .............................................. 8-12
Safe driving techniques ......................... 6-4 Replacement................................... 9-31 Trailer towing..................................... 6-11
Seat belts ............................................. 4-7 Storage spaces .................................... 5-92 Trunk lid............................................ 5-27
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor. 4-12
12-4
Alphabetical index
Turn signal light Wheel
Indicators....................................... 5-75 Covers........................................... 8-11
Lever ............................................. 5-80 Specification.................................. 11-5
Wiper
U Switch........................................... 5-81
Wiper blades.................................. 9-19
USB input terminal ............................. 5-84
How to connect a USB memory device ....
5-85
How to connect an iPod................... 5-85
V
Vanity mirror ..................................... 5-85
Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-32
Vehicle dimensions............................. 11-3
Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2
Vehicle preparation before driving.......... 6-3
Vehicle weights .................................. 11-4
Vents ................................................... 7-2
12
W
Warning lights.................................... 5-75
Washer
Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-6
Switch .................................. 5-81, 5-82
Washing............................................. 9-34
Waxing .............................................. 9-34
Weights ............................................. 11-4
12-5
How to calculate your gasoline mileage

Owners Manual Mirage G4 2018 PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Owners Manual Mirage G4 2018 PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Outlander

/ 2018 OWNER’S MANUAL

© Copyright 2017 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

Instrument cluster P.5-63

Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-81

Wiper and washer switch P.5-81

Cruise control switches

Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13

Fuse box P.9-22 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-driver’s knee airbag

Instruments and controls

Automatic air conditioning (if so

Engine hood release lever Glove compartment

Power window lock switch

Power door lock switch (if so Assist grips

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-

Manual window control Supplemental restraint system

Trunk room light P.9-28

Windshield wipers P.5-81

Fuel tank filler P.3-3

Engine hood P.9-4

F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced

Tire pressure monitoring system

Rear-view camera (if so equipped)

Trunk lid P.5-27

Rear side- marker lights P.5-78, 9-27, 9-31

Back-up light P.9-27, 9-31

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

2-2 Quick index

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

SRS warning light

 Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized

Quick index 2-3

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

The engine does not start when

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-

Quick index 2-5

If this problem occurs...

The engine does not start.

The engine is overheated.

Steam comes out of the engine

2-6 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Quick index 2-7

Your vehicle is designed to operate on

3-2 General information

Filling the fuel tank

General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank

4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel tank CAUTION